JP2019093207A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest of a game and reducing a decrease in operation of the game machine.SOLUTION: A plurality of specific notification data include at least first specific notification data and second specific notification data, can determine the first specific notification data with prescribed probability when a game period until a prescribed game period passes is a first range and when it is a second range, can determine the second specific notification data with specific probability, can determine the second specific notification data with prescribed probability when a game period until the prescribed game period passes is a third range and when it is a fourth range, and can determine the first specific notification data with specific probability. A game period is short until the prescribed game period passes in the order of the third range, the first range, the fourth range, the second range.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when game media such as medals and coins are inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, rotation of a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface is started, and the stop button is operated. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped and a privilege is given according to a combination of displayed symbols.

  In such a game machine, when an operation to the start lever (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning". Control the drive of the stepping motor to start the rotation of a plurality of reels, and detect the operation on the stop button (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”) with the stop switch, the stepping motor Drive control, and control to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, when transitioning to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, ART), the number of times the stop operation is performed in a predetermined pushing order at the time of winning of the reordering player without any order and a specific pushing order. When the winning combination is won, the number of times the stop operation is performed in a predetermined pushing order different from the specific pushing order is counted, and when the counted value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 4) There is known a gaming machine which outputs a signal indicating that it is in an advantageous gaming state from an external concentrated terminal board (Patent Document 1).

  According to this gaming machine, every time the counted value reaches a predetermined value, a signal indicating that it is in the advantageous gaming state is output from the external concentrated terminal board, so that the advantageous gaming state is properly performed. It is possible to transmit the number of transitions to the outside.

JP, 2013-192724, A

  By the way, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, the advantageous gaming state is transitioned from normal gaming for the first time (hereinafter referred to as "first hit") and the advantageous gaming state continues during the advantageous gaming state. Although there are cases, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, these are output from the external concentrated terminal board as a common signal.

  Therefore, depending on the number of transitions to the advantageous gaming state displayed on the external indicator or the like connected to the external concentrated terminal board, the player may determine the number of first hits and the number of continuation of the advantageous gaming state. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the player can not start and hesitate to start the game.

  Further, from the viewpoint of security, since the main control circuit and the sub control circuit, and the main control circuit and the external display etc. are connected in one direction only, the main control circuit is advantageously managed by the sub control circuit. Since it is not possible to output a signal from the external concentrated terminal board according to the request from the external display etc. while watching the status of the gaming state, for example, it copes with even when a communication error or the like occurs. There is also the fact that you can not do it.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game and reducing the decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention controls an advantageous gaming state in which an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) advantageous to the player is controlled until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied based on the predetermined starting condition being satisfied. A gaming machine comprising: means; notification means for performing notification of various information to a player; and notification control means for controlling notification performed by the notification means, wherein the advantageous game state control is performed The means determines that the predetermined start condition has elapsed from the establishment of the predetermined end condition in at least the normal gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state as the predetermined start condition, and the notification control means determines the normal gaming state In accordance with the game period until the predetermined game period has elapsed, one specific notification data is determined from among a plurality of specific notification data, and notification according to the determined specific notification data The plurality of specific notification data includes at least a first specific notification data and a second specific notification data, and the game period until the predetermined game period elapses is the first to be executed by the notification means. And the second range, the first specific broadcast data can be determined with a predetermined probability, and the second specific broadcast data can be determined with a specific probability The second specific notification data can be determined with the predetermined probability when the game period until the predetermined game period passes is the third range and when it is the fourth range The first specific notification data can be determined with the specific probability, and the predetermined game period is in the order of the third range, the first range, the fourth range, and the second range. The game period until it passes is short The features.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the plurality of specific notification data further includes third specific notification data, and the game period until the predetermined game period elapses is the first range. When the third specific notification data can be determined with the predetermined probability, and the gaming period until the predetermined gaming period elapses is the second range and the third range And the third specific broadcast data can be determined with the specific probability when in the fourth range.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and reduce the decrease in the operation of the game machine.

It is a figure showing a functional flow of a pachislot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine concerning the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the state of the front panel in the state where a movable part is in an initial position in a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the state of the front panel in the state where a movable part is in an effect position in a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the front panel in the pachislot machine concerning the embodiment of the present invention. The inner structure of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention is shown, and it is a front view of the state which the front door opened. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit with which the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a sub control circuit in a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram of the gaming state in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure showing the symbol code chart in the pachislot machine concerning the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the bonus part memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the replay part memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small winning combination memorized by main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small winning combination memorized by main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for general game states memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RB gaming state memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for small part and replay memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for bonus memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the stop operation order and internal winning combination with respect to the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the pushing order small part in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention, (b) is the structure of the pushing order small part in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of pushing order small part when not applying. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storing area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the display combination storing area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area allocated to in RAM. It is a figure which shows the carrying-over combination storage area allocated to in RAM. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement stop button storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the presentation game state storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the reel action lottery table for main CZ states memorize | stored in main ROM. (A) is a pseudo game frequency lottery table stored in the main ROM, (b) is a pseudo internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM, (c) is a high probability transition lottery table stored in the main ROM, d) is a diagram showing a high securing failure game number lottery table stored in the main ROM, and (e) is a diagram showing a pseudo probability change state ending lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the reel action lottery table for definite combination stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the mode suggestion production lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the number-of-remaining-games suggestion presentation lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the estimation example of the number of remaining games by the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effect in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the in-AT point addition lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the AT frequency addition lottery table in the superimposition state memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the point addition lottery table in the addition state memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the data for reel production selection memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the excitation output table for effects memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation symbol position search data memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows main control processing of a pachislot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of the power activation performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the medal reception / start check process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lock | rock lottery process performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process in the pseudo-probability state currently performed in the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing lottery processing during a normal game executed in the lock lottery processing shown in FIG. 46. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a game start time lock execution process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. 50 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game process executed in the game start time lock execution process shown in FIG. 49. It is a flowchart which shows the state management process performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing a during-AT state management process executed in the state management process shown in FIG. 51. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external signal output management process performed in the state management process shown in FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing a game end lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption processing by control of main CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an input port check process performed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. It is a flowchart which shows the communication data transmission process performed in the interruption process shown in FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a reel control process that is executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a reel effect control process executed in the reel control process shown in FIG. 58. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a reel effect adjustment output process executed in the reel effect control process shown in FIG. 59. 60 is a flowchart showing a reel effect adjustment output process executed in the reel effect control process shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing effect symbol position update processing executed in the reel effect adjustment output processing shown in FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power activation process of sub CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task started in the mother task started by the power-on process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the main board | substrate communication task shown in FIG. Fig. 67 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process performed in the command analysis process shown in Fig. 67; FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68. FIG. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing a process during an additional state executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69. FIG. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing pseudo probability change state processing executed in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 69. FIG. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing a normal game in process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing AT entry processing which is executed in the normal game processing shown in FIG. 72 and the lock command reception processing shown in FIG. 74; FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a lock command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68; FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing a winning operation command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lock | rock lottery process performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 42 based on other embodiment of this invention. 42 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42 according to another embodiment of the present invention. 56 is a flowchart showing an input port check process performed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the stop operation continuation suggestion effect based on other embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine which is a specific example of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described based on the drawings. First, referring to FIG. 1, a functional flow of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

[Function flow of Pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, in a pachislot machine (for example, pachislot machine 1 described later), medals are inserted by the player and a start lever (e.g. start lever 16 described later) is operated. One value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in the range of numerical values (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 51 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determination means is a predetermined among the plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game for the start lever by the start switch (for example, start switch 16S described later) (establishment of a predetermined start condition) Determine the internal winning combination by winning probability.

  The determination of the internal winning combination determines the combination of symbols that allow display along the pay line. The types of combinations of symbols include those related to "winning" in which the player is given a benefit such as payout of medals, activation of replay (replay), activation of bonus, etc., and other so-called "loss" The ones concerned are provided.

  Also, the pachislot machine can perform control to stop the progress of the game. Such control is referred to as "freeze" or "lock". For convenience, the control to stop the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is called "lock at the start of the game", and the control to stop the progress of the game executed at the end of the game is "lock at the end of game" Call. That is, "lock at game start" means that the operation to the stop button (for example, the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R described later) is not effective in a predetermined period after the start lever is operated. The control is to stop the progress of the game in the sense, "lock at the end of the game" is the operation to the bet button or the operation to the start lever in a predetermined period after the stop button is operated Is a control in which the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that it does not become effective. Of course, the trigger for "freeze" or "lock" is not limited to the above. For example, after the start lever 16 is operated and one of the stop buttons is operated, then in a predetermined period, It is possible to carry out control in which the operation of is not effective.

  The internal winning combination determining means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines whether to perform "freeze" or "locking" instead of the internal winning combination or with the internal winning combination. It is also good. Also, at that time, whether a plurality of random number values are extracted, an internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random number values, and “freeze” or “lock” is performed based on the other one random number value It may be determined whether or not.

  Subsequently, after the reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later) are rotated, when the player presses the stop button, the reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 62 described later) The stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R described later perform control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed.

  Here, in the pachislot machine, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a prescribed time (190 msec or 75 msec) after the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols moving with the rotation of the reel within the prescribed time is referred to as the “number of sliding symbols”. If the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be four symbols, and if the prescribed period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be one symbol. The maximum number of sliding symbols is not limited to these, and can be set as appropriate.

  The reel stop control means uses the specified time when the internal winning combination which permits the display of the combination of symbols related to winning is determined, the pay line (hereinafter referred to as “the combination of symbols is activated. The rotation of the reel is stopped in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible along the "effective line".

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, reels are used in the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols so as not to be displayed along the effective line using the above-mentioned prescribed time Stop rotating.

  Further, when the determined internal winning combination changes the combination of symbols displayed according to the predetermined stop operation order, the reel stop control means also determines the predetermined stop operation order. Control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel with reference.

  Thus, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the prize determination means determines whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line relates to a prize.

  That is, when the reel stop control means stops the fluctuation of the symbols, the prize determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line.

  When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above are performed as one game (unit game) in a pachislot machine.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop operation of the reel performed first when all the reels are rotating is the first stop operation, and the second stop operation performed after the first stop operation is the second stop operation, the first stop operation. The second stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine, various effects are performed by the effect executing means (informing means) in the above-described series of flows. These effects are displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later), light output performed by a lamp (for example a lamp group 21 described later), and speakers (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later) It is performed by the output of the sound performed by these, or these combination.

  When the player operates the start lever, in addition to the random number value used to determine the internal winning combination as described above, other lottery processing, for example, a random value for effect (hereinafter, random number for effect) is extracted Ru.

  When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means (for example, a sub CPU 81 described later) randomly determines what is to be executed this time out of a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the effect content is determined, the effect execution means is interlocked with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, and when the determination of the presence or absence of winning is performed. Perform the effect.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine, the player has an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed) by executing the presentation contents corresponding to the internal winning combination. It is provided to improve the player's interest.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 6.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 3 is a front panel of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention with movable parts in the initial position. FIG. 4 is a front view of the state of the front panel in the state where the movable part is in the effect position in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the front panel of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 6 shows the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention It is a front view of the state where the door was opened.

  The pachislot machine 1 is a gaming machine for playing a game using a coin, a medal, a game ball, a token, etc., and a game medium such as a card storing information of the game value given or given to the player. However, below, it demonstrates as what uses a medal.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a which is a main body for accommodating a reel, a circuit board and the like, and a front door 2b attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be able to open and close. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handle 7 on one side is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a concave portion which is used to carry the pachi-slot machine 1 during transportation.

  The front door 2 b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3) showing one specific example of a display device, and a waist panel 12. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be able to open and close using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side inside the cabinet 2a. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has a cylindrical reel body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) designs are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper portion of the door main body 9 and performs effects by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including display windows 4L, 4C, 4R for displaying symbols drawn on three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. In the present embodiment, video is displayed and effects are performed using the entire display unit 11a including the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

  The display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of, for example, a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement areas of the three reels as viewed from the front (the player side), and are positioned in front of the three reels (the player side) Provided in Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are continuously arranged among the plural types of symbols drawn on the respective reels when the rotation of the corresponding reels provided behind them is stopped. It is set to the size which can display three designs. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, upper, middle and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. In the present embodiment, the middle reel region of the left reel 3L, the middle reel region of the middle reel 3C, and the line connecting the middle reel region of the right reel 3R (center line) are determined as winning lines for determining whether or not winning is achieved. Define.

  The front panel 10 is attached to the upper portion of the door body 9 and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is disposed so as to be superimposed on the display unit 11 a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and covers the decorative frame 101 having a panel opening 101 a for exposing the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11. And a protective cover 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 5).

  As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative frame 101 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a panel opening 101a. The decorative frame 101 has an upper frame portion 111, a lower frame portion 112, a left frame portion 113, and a right frame portion 114. The decorative frame 101 is formed so that a pattern is generated on the surface by mixing a mixture with resin and injection molding. In order to produce a pattern on the surface by such molding, for example, the position of the injection gate may be adjusted.

  The upper frame portion 111 is provided with a plurality of upper engagement holes 111 a opening forward. The openings of the plurality of upper engagement holes 111a are each formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. An upper engagement piece 126, which will be described later, of the protective cover 102 is inserted into the plurality of upper engagement holes 111a.

  Further, the left frame portion 113 is provided with a plurality of left engagement holes 113a opened to the front, and the right frame portion 114 is provided with a plurality of right engagement holes 114a opened to the front. The openings of the plurality of left engagement holes 113a and right engagement holes 114a are each formed in a vertically long rectangle. A left engagement piece 127 and a right engagement piece 128, which will be described later, of the protective cover 102 are inserted into the plurality of left engagement holes 113a and the right engagement holes 114a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the protective cover 102 is formed of a translucent synthetic resin, and includes a front surface 121 facing forward, an upper surface 122 facing upward, and a lower surface 123 facing downward. , Laterally facing left side 124 and right side 125.

  In the lower part of the front face portion 121, switch notches 121a and 121b for exposing the effect switches 22L and 22R described later are formed. The switch notches 121a and 121b are formed in an arc shape corresponding to the outer shape of the effect switches 22L and 22R.

  A plurality of upper engagement pieces 126 are provided on the end face of the upper surface portion 122. The plurality of upper engagement pieces 126 are formed in a flat plate shape having a plane substantially orthogonal to the vertical direction, and have flexibility. Further, on the upper surface (one plane) of the plurality of upper engagement pieces 126, an engagement protrusion 126a is provided.

  When the upper engagement pieces 126 are inserted into the plurality of upper engagement holes 111 a of the decoration frame 101, the engagement ridges 126 a engage with the upper frame portion 111 of the decoration frame 101, and the protective cover 102 is detached from the decoration frame 101 It can be avoided.

  The left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 of the protective cover 102 are continuous with the front surface portion 121 at an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the left side surface part 124 and the right side surface part 125 have the protrusion piece 124A and the protrusion piece 125A which protrude ahead rather than the front surface part 121. As shown in FIG. The end faces of the left side face part 124 and the right side face part 125 facing forward are the end faces on the side of the projecting piece 124A and the projecting piece 125A, and are formed in an arc shape such that the central part projects most forward.

  A plurality of right engagement pieces 128 are provided on the end face of the right side face 125 facing the rear. The left side surface portion 124 is provided with a plurality of left engagement pieces 127 (not shown) in the same manner as the right engagement piece 128 in the right side surface portion 125. The plurality of left engagement pieces 127 and the plurality of right engagement pieces 128 are formed in a flat plate shape having a plane substantially orthogonal to the left-right direction.

  The right side portion 125 is provided with a decorative portion 125 a. The decorative portion 125 a is formed by embossing a part of the outer surface of the right side surface portion 125. The decorative portion 125 a receives light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided at the back of the right engagement hole 114 a of the decorative frame 101 and emits light. In the right side surface portion 125, a region where the decorative portion 125a is not provided is a light transmitting portion that transmits light.

  Further, the left side face part 124 is provided with a decorative part (not shown) similar to the decorative part 125 a of the right side face part 125. The decorative portion (not shown) of the left side surface portion 124 receives light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided at the back of the left engagement hole 113 a of the decorative frame 101 and emits light. In addition, in the left side surface part 124, the area | region in which the decoration part is not provided is a translucent part which permeate | transmits light.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the decoration frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and presentation switches 22L and 22R. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, the lamps 21a and 21b in FIG. The lamp group 21 is configured of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and lights and extinguishes light in a pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect. The effect switches 22L and 22R are provided on the left and right sides of the decorative frame 101, respectively.

  Further, the center movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107 are attached to the decoration frame 101.

  The central movable unit 105 is disposed at the upper central portion in the decoration frame 101 and has a movable part 309 described later. For example, when a specific effect is performed, the central movable unit 105 rotates the movable part 309 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the left and right direction, and from below the decorative cover 364 Let down. Thereby, the movable part 309 moves to an effect position (see FIG. 4) covering a part of the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the movable part 309 is composed of the character part 323, the arch cover 324, and the light emitting display part 325, and when the movable part 309 is disposed at the rendering position, the character part 323 and the arch cover 324. The light emitting display portion 325 can be viewed from the front of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, although not shown, in the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display portion 325, transmission regions for transmitting the light emitted from the LEDs (not shown) provided on their back surfaces are individually formed. There is. In particular, in the light emitting display portion 325, a plurality of (for example, three) transmission regions are formed in parallel so that lighting display of a plurality of steps (for example, three steps) can be performed in stages.

  The left movable unit 106 is disposed on the left side in the decoration frame 101, and has a left door 188 described later. The right movable unit 107 is disposed on the right side in the decoration frame 101, and has a right door 189 described later. The left door 188 and the right door 189 are formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape having an appropriate thickness, and one plane faces the front in the initial position.

  For example, when a predetermined effect is performed, the left movable unit 106 rotates the left door 188 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the vertical direction. Further, for example, when a predetermined effect is performed, the right movable unit 107 rotates the right door 189 at the initial position about an axis extending in the vertical direction. In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined effect is performed, either one of the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated, or both of the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a pedestal 13 is formed on the waist panel 12. The pedestal 13 is provided with various devices to be operated by the player (the medal insertion slot 14, the MAX bet button 15A, the 1 BET button 15B, the start lever 16, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, the settlement button 18). ing.

  The medal insertion slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped from the outside onto the pachislot machine 1 by the player. The medals received from the medal insertion slot 14 are used for one game with a predetermined number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the portion exceeding the predetermined number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (so-called credit) function).

  The MAX bet button 15A and the 1 BET button 15B are provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, the settlement button 18 is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 7) formed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 6 includes information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a bonus (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). Display digitally.

  In the lower part of the door main body 9, a medal payout port 24, a medal receiving tray 25, speakers 20L, 20R and the like are provided. The medal payout port 24 guides the medals discharged by the driving of a medal payout device 33 described later to the outside. The medal receiver 25 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. Further, the speakers 20L and 20R output sounds such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effects.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 6, the cabinet 2a is formed in the substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape by which 1 surface of front side was opened. A main substrate 31 constituting a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, is provided at an upper portion in the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of internal winning combinations, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C and a right reel 3R) are provided at a central portion in the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 6, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R in FIG. 7) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. .

  A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of containing a large amount of medals and capable of discharging them one by one is provided at a lower portion in the cabinet 2a. In addition, on one side (the left side in the example shown in FIG. 6) of the hopper 33 in the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 4 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1 is provided. .

  A sub-substrate 32 constituting a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 8) described later is provided on the top of the back side (the part opposite to the display screen side) of the front door 2b. The sub control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of effects by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Further, a selector 35 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, etc. of medals inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2) are appropriate, and hoppers of medals determined to be appropriate Guide to 33. Further, although not shown in FIG. 6, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 7) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, the configuration of the circuit provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an entire configuration of a circuit included in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 shows an internal configuration of a sub control circuit in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram. The pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control circuit 41, a sub control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these.

<Main control circuit>
The main control circuit 41 mainly includes a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. Including 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, data tables such as an internal lottery table, and data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42. . The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  To the main CPU 51, a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected. Clock pulse generating circuit 54 and frequency divider 55 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 51 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates a random number (for example, 0 to 65535) within a predetermined range. Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and the like, and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R.

  The stop switch 17S detects that the player has pressed the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R (stop operation). The start switch 16S detects that the player has operated the start lever 16 (start operation). The settlement switch 18S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player.

  The medal sensor 35S detects that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 has passed through the inside of the selector 35. Further, the bet switch 15S detects that the player has pressed the bet button (the MAX bet button 15A or the 1 BET button 15B).

  Further, as peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. Further, a drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R respectively provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index which indicates that the reel has rotated once by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the amount of motion is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. Also, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a fixed angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times the pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, whereby the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, the number of symbols of the reel) Manage only what).

  Here, management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, every time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 17 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 1 "is added. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 63 detects a reel index.

  That is, in this embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbol rotation operations have been performed since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected on the basis of the position where the reel index is detected.

  The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 66 manages detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether the medals discharged from the hopper 33 to the outside have reached a predetermined number of payouts. Do.

  Although not shown, an external concentrated terminal plate is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. The external concentration terminal board receives signals from the main control circuit 41 such as the number of inserted / paid medals, the number of times played, the bonus operation presence / absence information, etc., and displays those signals as the number of games played, the number of bonus operations, etc. It is output as an external signal to the external display or the host computer of the game arcade. The external indicator is installed, for example, above the pachislot machine 1 and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, or notifies the bonus operation with a lamp or the like.

<Sub control circuit>
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effects based on commands transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . The sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86, as shown in FIG. Further, the sub control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, an A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, a central movable unit drive circuit 96, a left movable unit drive circuit 97, and a right movable It includes a unit drive circuit 98 and a rotary lamp drive circuit 99.

  The sub CPU 81 performs output control of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  In the program storage area, various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a random number for effect extraction, and determination of effect contents (effect data) The effect registration task for performing registration, the drawing control task for controlling the display of the image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, the lamp control task for controlling the light output by the lamp group 21, the speaker A program such as a voice control task for controlling the output of sound according to 20L and 20R is included.

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data forming various presentation contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video, and sound data for BGM and sound effects And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined rendering content and rendering data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the sub control circuit 42 includes the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20 L and 20 R, the lamp group 21, the center movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, the right movable unit 107, and the rotary light 543. And other peripheral devices are connected. That is, the operation of these peripheral devices is controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and the created video is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Displayed by.

  The sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the A / D converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 81 performs lighting and extinguishing of the lamp group 21 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

  The sub CPU 81 and the central movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the central movable unit 105 in accordance with the central movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. That is, when the specific effect is performed, the central movable unit 105 is driven to move the movable component 309 to a position that covers a part of the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 in accordance with the left movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 in accordance with the right movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. Further, the sub CPU 81 and the rotary light drive circuit 99 drive the rotary light 543 in accordance with the rotary light drive data specified by the effect contents.

  In the present embodiment, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, sub CPU 81 is in a state to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player according to the determined internal winning combination. The advantage game state control means which controls to a state is comprised. Such an advantageous gaming state is called "AT".

[Transition of gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 will be described. The main CPU 51 is configured to change, as the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1, two gaming states, a general gaming state (RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) and a BB gaming state (RB gaming state).

<Transition of general gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 51 takes one of the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state as a general gaming state. In the RT0 gaming state, when the bonus combination (BB in this embodiment) which is the bonus operating role is internally won, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state.

  The RT0 gaming state is a replay low probability state (a low RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay role that is the player of the replay is relatively lower than that of the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay role is relatively higher than that of the RT0 gaming state.

  Here, there is no direct transition from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, and winning in the BB in the RT1 gaming state, transitioning to the BB gaming state, and ending the BB gaming state results in the RT0 gaming state again. It will be migrated.

  In addition, BB is always in a state of internal winning between internal winning and winning. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “BB carryover state”. That is, in the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state and the BB carry-over state are equivalent to each other.

  Note that the RT1 gaming state is not an RT managed by the number of games, but is a gaming state in which transition is made only when transition conditions as described above are satisfied. In that sense, the RT1 gaming state is infinite RT.

<Transition of BB gaming state>
In addition, when the BB is won, the main CPU 51 shifts the gaming state to the BB gaming state. In the present embodiment, the BB gaming state is always controlled in the RB gaming state, and when the BB ending condition is satisfied, specifically, the specified number of sheets in the BB gaming state (75 in the present embodiment) When there is a payout of medals exceeding), the BB gaming state and the RB gaming state are ended, and the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the internal lottery table for general gaming state described later, in the RT1 gaming state, any internal winning combination is determined by lottery. That is, a unit game which is in the BB carryover state and is not won in any small part or replay role is generated only in a unit game internally won in BB. The internal winning combination can be roughly divided into a replay role, a minor role, and a bonus role, but as shown in FIG. 19 described later, in the present embodiment, the replay role or minor role is more than BB. It is configured to be preferentially stopped.

  Therefore, when BB is internally won but BB can not win in the unit game, until a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (for example, all memory due to backup error of main RAM 33 at the time of power on) Region initialization) RT1 gaming state will continue.

  Note that the transition of the gaming state is not limited to the one described above. For example, by providing a plurality of combinations of symbols of bell lip to be described later, the symbols of one bell lip can be different by changing combinations of symbols to be prized according to the stop operation sequence at the time of winning regular lips 1 to 4 or bell lip 1 to 4 to be described later. When the combination of has won, it is possible to shift to the above-mentioned RT1 gaming state, and when the combination of symbols of other bell lip is won, it is possible to shift to the above-mentioned RT0 gaming state.

  In this case, when the sub CPU 81 is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, a stop operation order in which a combination of symbols of one bell lip is to be won is notified first, and by performing the stop operation according to the notification, The RT0 gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state. Then, in the RT1 gaming state, the stop operation order in which combinations of other symbols of the bell lip do not win is notified, and the stop operation order in which the payout of medals is increased most is notified for each small winning combination. In the same way, it is possible to configure an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

[Data table stored in main ROM]
Next, various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between twenty symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to each of the symbol positions.

  The symbol position data “0” to “19” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotational direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be identified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  As a kind of pattern, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "watermelon C", "white blank" and "purple blank" Contains ".

  Here, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B” and “watermelon C” may be distinguishable if the main CPU 51 is internally different in design, and in the present embodiment, like the same design. It is a symbol that can be recognized by the player. Hereinafter, "watermelon A", "watermelon B" and "watermelon C" are collectively referred to as "watermelon".

<Symbol code table>
As shown in FIG. 11, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 2-byte (16 bits) data in the present embodiment. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 11 represents symbol codes as data for identifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  For example, although the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R, it is actually stored in main ROM 52 The symbol arrangement table indicates the arrangement of symbol codes specifying the symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are “red 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, “bell”, “cherry”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, “red 7” as described above. 10 types of watermelon C "," white blank "and" purple blank ".

  In the symbol code table, "1" is assigned as a symbol code for the "red 7" symbol. Also, "2" is assigned as a symbol code for the "BAR" symbol. Also, "3" is assigned as a symbol code for the "replay" symbol.

  Similarly, "4" to "10" are used as symbol codes for symbols of "bell", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "watermelon C", "white blank" and "purple blank" respectively It is assigned.

<Symbol combination table>
In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, a winning operation flag and a payout number are associated with a combination of symbols identified by storage area identification data represented by 27 bytes.

  The prize operation flag is data assigned corresponding to a unique combination of symbols for representing a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "winning combination"), and includes 1 byte (8 bits) data and storage area type It is. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data. One-byte data includes data corresponding to a combination of a plurality of symbols. The combination of each symbol is distinguished by the storage area type and 1-byte data.

  In the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, in order to make the invention easy to understand, names (contents) of winning combinations are associated with winning operation flags for combinations of respective symbols.

  The number of payouts is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player corresponding to the combination of the respective symbols. When the combination of symbols arranged along the effective line matches the "combination of symbols" of the symbol combination table, the medal device is discharged or the number of credits is counted based on the corresponding number of payouts. The credit counter is incremented.

  FIG. 12 shows a symbol combination table related to a bonus combination. When a combination of “watermelon B-BAR-white blank” symbol representing a winning combination called “BB” is displayed along the effective line when in the normal gaming state (RT1 gaming state), the medal Although there is no payout, it means that BB has won. That is, when “BB” is won when the player is in the normal gaming state (RT1 gaming state), it shifts to the BB gaming state.

  FIG. 13 shows a symbol combination table related to the replay role. When the combination of the symbols shown in FIG. 13 is displayed along the activated line, there is no payout of medals, but it indicates that the player has won a prize for playing a replay. That is, when the replay role is won, replay can be performed in the next game.

  In FIG. 13, when a combination of symbols of "Replay-Replay-Replay" representing a winning combination called "middle rep" is displayed along the effective line, the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R is displayed. "Replay" is complete.

  When a combination of symbols of “Bell-Replay-Red 7” representing a winning combination called “Cross-up Lip 1” is displayed along the effective line, “right up” in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R “ "Replay" is complete. The same applies to “Cross-Up Lip 2” to “Cross-Up Lip 4” as well as “Cross-Up Lip 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon A-Replay-Watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "Crossdown Lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, the display window 4L, 4C, 4R is in the lower right. "Replay" is complete. The same applies to “crossdown lip 2” to “crossdown lip 6” as well as “crossdown lip 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "Replay-Bell-Cherry" representing a winning combination called "Berlip" is displayed along the effective line, "bells" are aligned in the lower right of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, only the above-mentioned center line is an effective line, but the combination of symbols relating to the replay role is configured as shown in FIG. 13 and will be described later in the description of FIG. The combination of symbols pertaining to the small part (for example, upper bell 1-12, cross-up bell 1-9, lower bell 1 to 3 and cross-down watermelon 1 to 4 etc.) is similarly configured, as if five lines ( Impress the player as if the center line in the middle, the top line in the upper row, the bottom line in the lower row, the cross down line in the lower right, and the cross up line in the upper right) are valid lines. It can be done.

  When a combination of symbols of "Replay-Replay-Cherry" representing a winning combination called "Chance Rep A1" is displayed along the effective line, "Bell" is displayed at the top of the display window 4L, and the bottom of the display window 4C. "BELL" is displayed at the bottom of the display window 4R. That is, two “bells” are displayed on at least one of the five lines described above (for example, the bottom line aligned in the lower row or the cross-down line aligned downward to the right) (hereinafter, “tempay”) And the remaining one "bell" is displayed on the other line (hereinafter referred to as "tenpai"). As for "Chance Lip A2" to "Chance Lip A5" and "Chance Lip B1" to "Chance Lip B3" as well as "Chance Lip A1", "Bell" is out of balance in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. Is displayed.

  When a combination of symbols of "Bell-watermelon A-watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "special lip A1" is displayed along the effective line, "watermelon" is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It is displayed by the tempap. The same applies to “special lip A1” to “special lip A6” and “special lip B”.

  When a combination of symbols of "BAR-BAR-BAR" representing a winning combination called "BAR Lip A" is displayed along the effective line, "BAR" is displayed in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. Align. In addition, when a combination of symbols of "Replay-BAR-Cherry" representing a winning combination called "BAR Lip E" is displayed along the effective line, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are displayed in the upper right direction. "BAR" may be aligned.

  When a combination of symbols of "BAR-BAR-watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "BAR lip B1" is displayed along the effective line, "BAR" is displayed on the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It will be displayed off. The same applies to “BAR lip B2”, “BAR lip B3”, “BAR lip C”, “BAR lip D1”, and “BAR lip D2” as well as “BAR lip B1”.

  "Replay" in the lower part of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R when a combination of symbols of "BELL-BAR-Watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "BAR Lip B 4" is displayed along the effective line. It is ready. The same applies to "BAR lip B5" and "BAR lip B6" as in "BAR lip B4".

  When a combination of symbols of "cherry-ANY-ANY" representing a winning combination called "cherry lip A" is displayed along the effective line, "cherry" is displayed in the middle of the display window 4L. Note that "ANY" indicates that any symbol may be used. That is, in "Cherry Lip A", if "Cherry" is displayed in the middle of the display window 4L, it becomes a combination of symbols for which winning is determined regardless of the symbols displayed on the display windows 4C and 4R. ing.

  "Red 7" in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R when a combination of "Watermelon A-Red 7-Cherry" symbol representing a winning combination called "Cherry Lip B1" is displayed along the effective line. May be displayed on the outside of the main screen, but basically, the symbol displayed when the symbol of "cherry" in "cherry lip A" described above can not be displayed in the middle of the display window 4L. Defined as a combination of The same applies to “cherry lip B2” to “cherry lip B8” and “cherry lip C” as well as “cherry lip B1”.

  FIG. 14 a and FIG. 14 b show symbol combination tables according to a small combination in which medals are paid out. When the combination of symbols shown in FIGS. 14a and 14b is displayed along the effective line, medals of the number of payouts associated with the combination of symbols are paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of "Replay-Watermelon A-Watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "Upper Bell 1" is displayed along the effective line, "Bell" is displayed on the upper side in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. "7," 7 medals are paid out. The “upper bell 2” to “upper bell 12” are also the same as “upper bell 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon A-bell-watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "Cross-up bell 1" is displayed along the effective line, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are in the upper right direction. The "bells" are aligned and seven medals are paid out. The same applies to “cross-up bell 2” to “cross-up bell 9” as in “cross-up bell 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "BAR-Bel-Replay" representing a winning combination called "Middle 1st 2nd Incorrect Solution A1" is displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect solution A2" to "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect solution A9" and "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1" to "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect solution B9" as in "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1".

  In addition, as described later in the description of FIG. 19, “middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer” means, for example, “middle left and right cross-up bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination as “push order small part”. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C and 17R are operated in the middle left and right stop operation order, one of the "Cross-up bell 1" to "Cross-up bell 9" is won, and seven medals are paid out If the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated in the "middle right left" stop operation order, the stop operation order of the first stop operation is correct but the second stop operation stop operation Since the order is incorrect, one of “Middle 1st 2nd Incorrect A1” to “Medium 1st 2nd Incorrect A9” is a prize, and it represents that one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon A-watermelon A-bell" representing a winning combination called "right 1st incorrect solution A1" is displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to “right 1st incorrect solution A2” to “right 1st incorrect solution A4” and “right 1st incorrect solution B1” to “right 1st incorrect solution B4” as well as “right 1st incorrect solution A1”.

  Note that "right 1st incorrect answer" means, for example, that "middle left and right cross-up bell 1" is determined as the internal winning combination, as will be described later with reference to FIG. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C and 17R are operated in the middle left and right stop operation order, one of the "Cross-up bell 1" to "Cross-up bell 9" is won, and seven medals are paid out If the “right”, ie, the stop button 17R is operated for the first stop, the stop operation order becomes incorrect, so when “dropout” described later does not occur, “right 1st incorrect answer” One of “A1” to “right 1st incorrect answer A4” or “right 1st incorrect answer B1” to “right 1st incorrect answer B4” is a prize, and represents that one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" symbols representing a winning combination called "Mold-Bell" is displayed along the active line, "Bell" is aligned with the middle in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. , 7 medals are paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon A-purple blank-bell" representing a winning combination called "right 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1" is displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution A2” to “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution A6” and “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1” to “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B6” as well as “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1”.

  Note that "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer" means, for example, that "right and left middle middle bell 1" is determined as an internal winning combination as "push order small part", as described later in the description of FIG. When the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is operated in the middle “stop operation order”, “middle bell” is won and seven medals are paid out, but “right middle left” stop operation When the stop buttons 17L, 17C and 17R are operated in order, the stop operation order of the first stop operation is correct but the stop operation order of the second stop operation is incorrect. One of the correct answers A1 to the right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A6 is a prize, and represents that one medal is paid out.

  However, for “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1” to “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B6”, “middle left and right lower bell 1” to “middle left and right lower bell 3”, “middle right left lower bell 1” as “push order small part” ~ If any of the "middle right left lower bell 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "right", that is, if the stop button 17R is subjected to the first stop operation, the stop operation order will be incorrect. In this case, no “dropout” described later occurs, and one of “right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1” to “right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B6” wins, and one medal is paid out. Therefore, in the case of the above-mentioned internal winning combination, it can be said that it is "the right 1st incorrect answer" except that "dropout" described later does not occur.

  In addition, any of "right left middle lower bell 1" to "right left middle lower bell 3", "right middle left lower bell 1" to "right middle left lower bell 3" as an internal winning combination as "push order small part" If it is determined that the "medium", that is, the stop button 17C is operated for the first stop, the stop operation order becomes incorrect, but in this case, the "dropout" described later does not occur. One of “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1” to “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B6” is won, and one medal is paid out. Therefore, in the case of the above internal winning combination, it can be said that it is the "middle 1st incorrect answer" described later, except that "dropout" described later does not occur.

  When a combination of symbols of "Bell-Cherry-BAR" representing a winning combination called "Middle 1st Incorrect Answer A1" is displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to “medium 1st incorrect solution A2” to “medium 1st incorrect solution A4” and “medium 1st incorrect solution B1” to “medium 1st incorrect solution B4” as “medium 1st incorrect solution A1”.

  In addition, as described later in the description of FIG. 19, “middle 1st incorrect answer” means, for example, that “right left middle middle bell 1” is determined as an internal winning combination as “push order small part”. When the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is operated in the middle “stop operation order”, the “middle bell” is won and seven medals are paid out, but the “middle”, that is, the stop button 17C. When the first stop operation is performed, the stop operation order becomes incorrect. Therefore, when “dropout” described later does not occur, “middle 1st wrong answer A1” to “middle 1st wrong answer A4”, or One of the middle 1st wrong solution B1 to the middle 1st wrong solution B4 is a prize, and it represents that one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon A-Replay-Cherry" representing a winning combination called "lower bell 1" is displayed along the effective line, "bell" in the lower part of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R 7 medals are paid out. The “lower bell 2” and the “lower bell 3” are the same as the “lower bell 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "red 7-watermelon A-bell" representing a winning combination called "crossdown watermelon 1" is displayed along the effective line, the display window 4L, 4C, 4R falls to the right The "watermelon" is aligned and three medals are paid out. The same applies to “cross-down watermelon 2” to “cross-down watermelon 4” as well as “cross-down watermelon 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon B-watermelon A-watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "middle watermelon 1" is displayed along the effective line, the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R " Watermelon is complete, and 3 medals are paid out. The same applies to “middle watermelon 2” to “middle watermelon 6” as well as “middle watermelon 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "BAR-cherry-white blank" representing a winning combination called "corn cherry A1-1" is displayed along the effective line, "cherry" is displayed in the lower part of the display window 4L. And three medals are paid out. "Corn cherry A1-2"-"corn cherry A1-8", "corn cherry B1-1"-"corn cherry B1-4", "corn cherry B2-1"-"corn cherry B2-24", "corn Cherry B3-1 "to" corn cherry B3-4 "," corn cherry B4-1 "to" corn cherry B4-3 "," corn cherry B5-1 "to" corn cherry B5-4 "," corn cherry C1 -1 to "corn cherry C1-8", "corn cherry C2-1" to "corn cherry C2-12", "corn cherry C3-1" to "corn cherry C3-6", "corn cherry C4-1" “Cherry” is also displayed in the upper or lower portion of the display window 4L for “Cherry C4-3”, as in “Cherry A1-1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon B-bell-bell" representing a winning combination called "special combination A" is displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to "special role B" and "special role C" as in "special role A".

  Here, when the "special cherry", "strong cherry 1", and "strong cherry 2" are determined to be the internal winning combination, "special tribute" can not win any of the "corn cherry" mentioned above. In the case where the "cherry" can not be displayed in the upper or lower part of the display window 4L depending on the timing of the stop operation, the "special role" is preferentially displayed over the "BB". By performing stop control, "BB" is defined as a combination of symbols for controlling not to win.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the combination mentioned above is applied to the combination of symbols relating to the replay combination and the combination of symbols relating to the small combination so that it can be distinguished from others, but the name is not necessarily a combination of the symbols It does not limit the role of

<Internal lottery table>
In the plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, lottery values and data pointers for each gaming state are associated with winning numbers. The internal lottery table is usually stored in the main ROM 52 for each setting value (for example, setting values 1 to 6) of the pachislot machine 1. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, description will be made using one internal lottery table.

  In the present embodiment, the random value for lottery which is extracted from the predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value according to each winning number, and the result of subtraction becomes negative or not. An internal lottery is performed by making a determination (whether or not a so-called "worry" has occurred).

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that assigned data (that is, a data pointer) is determined. When the number of times the process of determining whether the result of subtraction has become negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process becomes "lost".

  In addition, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each winning number / number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)”. In the present embodiment, by using a plurality of types of internal lottery tables, the type of the internal winning combination determined and the winning probability are changed, and as a result, the expectation held by the player is made rough.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data for specifying an internal winning combination defined by an internal winning combination determination table described later.

  That is, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data in the small winning combination / replay combination determination table shown in FIG. 17 and the internal bonus combination determination table for bonus shown in FIG. . As the data pointer, the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

  The method of internal lottery processing is not limited to the method described above. For example, a lottery random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” corresponds to a lottery number corresponding to each winning number The internal lottery may be performed by sequentially adding up with the values and determining whether the result of the addition has reached a predetermined value (for example, has reached a predetermined value or more for each winning number).

(Internal lottery table for general gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 15, the internal gaming table for the general gaming state referred to in the general gaming state defines the lottery value of each winning number in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state. In the general gaming state internal lottery table, winning numbers “1” to “45” in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state are respectively associated with the small winning combination / replay data pointers “1” to “45”. Note that “(between BB flags)” in the RT1 gaming state is synonymous with the “BB carry-over state” described above.

  The lottery values of winning numbers “1” to “16” and “46” are different between the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, and the lottery values of winning numbers “17” to “45” are the same. The winning number “46” is associated with “1” as a bonus data pointer, and when BB is determined as an internal winning combination, only BB is determined as an internal winning combination (single winning). It is set.

  Specifically, in the RT0 gaming state, the lottery values of winning numbers “1” to “16” are set to “8978” when added together, and the lottery value of winning number “46” is set to “5851”. ing. On the other hand, in the RT1 gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16” are added together and set to “14829”, which is set higher than when in the RT0 gaming state, and the lottery number having the winning number “46” The value is set to "0". That is, the lottery value corresponding to the difference of the winning number "46" is assigned to the lottery value of the winning numbers "1" to "16".

(Internal lottery table for RB gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 16, the internal lottery table for the RB gaming state referred to in the RB gaming state defines the lottery value of each winning number in the RB gaming state. In the internal lottery table for the RB gaming state, the winning numbers "1" and "2" are respectively associated with the small part and replay data pointers "46" and "47". In the present embodiment, since the RB gaming state is always in the BB gaming state, the internal lottery table for the RB gaming state can be reworded as an internal lottery table for the BB gaming state.

<Internal winning combination decision table for small part / replay>
In the internal winning combination determination table for a small winning combination / replay shown in FIG. 17, data for identifying a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag) is associated with the small winning combination / replay data pointer. ing.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted for the small winning combination / replay data pointer for convenience, and the name (content) of the winning combination is The names of internal winning combinations (remarks) are associated.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of symbol combinations (winning operation flags) for which winning is permitted is associated with one data pointer, so that a plurality of combinations can be made in one internal lottery process. It is possible to be permitted to win a combination of symbols (winning operation flag). These internal lottery methods are referred to as a "simultaneous winning" method and a "double winning" method.

  In the present embodiment, one combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag) can be defined as "internal winning combination", or winning is permitted for one data pointer. A combination of a plurality of symbols (prize operation flag) can be defined as one internal winning combination, but in FIGS. 17 to 20, the latter will be described as an internal winning combination.

  In the internal winning combination determination table for small commercials and replays, the data pointer for small commercials and replays "0" is associated with "loss".

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “1” indicates “normal ripple 1” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "middle step lip", "cross-up lips 1 to 4", "cross down lips 1 to 6" and "ber lip" are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “2” indicates “normal ripple 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (winning operation flag), "middle step lip", "cross-up lips 1 to 4", "cross down lips 1 to 6", "ber lip" and "special lips A1 to 6" are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "3" indicates "normal lip 3" as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "middle step lip", "cross-up lips 1 to 4", "cross down lips 1 to 6", "ber lip" and "special lip B" are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “4” indicates “normal lip 4” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "middle step lip", "cross-up lip 1 to 4", "cross down lip 1 to 6", "bell lip", "special lip A1 to 6" and "special lip B" are associated It is done.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “5” indicates “Berlip 1” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( As the winning operation flag), "middle stage lip" and "berlip" are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “6” indicates “Berlip 2” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( As the winning operation flag), “middle stage lip”, “ber lip” and “special lip A1 to 6” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “7” indicates “Berlip 3” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( As the winning operation flag), "middle stage lip", "ber lip" and "special lip B" are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “8” indicates “Berlip 4” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( As the winning operation flag), “middle stage lip”, “ber lip”, “special reps A1 to 6” and “special lip B” are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "9" indicates "chance lip 1" as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), “chance letters A1 to 5” and “chance letters B1 to B3” are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination and replay, the data pointer for small winning combination and replay "10" indicates "chance lip 2" as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "chance reps A1 to 5", "chance reps B1 to 3" and "bell lip" are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “11” indicates “strong chance ripple” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "middle stage rep", "special reps A1 to 6" and "special rep B" are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “12” indicates “cherry lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( As the winning operation flag), “BAR Lip B1 to 6”, “BAR Lip C”, “BAR Lip D1,2”, “BAR Lip E”, “Cherry Lip A” and “Cherry Lip B1 to 8” are associated It is done.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “13” indicates “strong cherry lip” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "BAR Lip B1 to 6," "BAR Lip C," "BAR Lip D1,2", "BAR Lip E," "Cherry Lip A," "Cherry Lip B1 to 8," " The BAR lip A and the cherry lip C are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “14” indicates “BAR lip 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "middle step lip", "cross-up lip 1 to 4", "BAR lip A", "BAR lip B1 to 6", "BAR lip C" and "BAR lip D1, 2" are supported. It is attached.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “15” indicates “BAR lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "middle step lip", "cross-up lip 1 to 4", "BAR lip A", "BAR lip B1 to 6", "BAR lip C", "BAR lip D1, 2", " "Berlip" and "BAR Lip E" are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “16” indicates “fake BAR lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (prize operation flag), "middle stage lip", "cross-up lips 1 to 4" and "BAR lip D1, 2" are associated with each other.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “17” indicates “middle left and right cross-up bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and a winning is permitted. As the combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 1", "cross-up bell 1 to 9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 9" and "right 1st incorrect answer A1 to 4" are associated .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “18” indicates “middle left and right cross-up bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the combination of symbols (prize operation flag), "upper bell 2", "cross-up bell 1 to 9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 9" and "right 1st incorrect answer A1 to 4" are associated .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “19” indicates “middle left and right cross-up bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. “Upper bell 3”, “Cross-up bell 1 to 9”, “Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 9”, and “Right 1st incorrect answer A1 to 4” are associated as a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “20” indicates “middle right left cross-up bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. “Upper bell 4”, “Cross-up bell 1 to 9”, “Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 9” and “Right 1st incorrect answer B1 to 4” are associated with each other as a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the data pointer for small winning combination / replay "21" indicates "middle right left cross-up bell 2" as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Upper bell 5”, “Cross-up bell 1 to 9”, “Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 9” and “Right 1st incorrect answer B1 to 4” are associated with each other as a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) .

  In addition, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "22" indicates "middle right left cross-up bell 3" as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 6", "cross-up bell 1 to 9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 9" and "right 1st incorrect answer B1 to 4" are associated .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “23” indicates “right middle left middle bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and symbols for which winning is permitted are allowed. As the combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 7”, “middle bell”, “right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 6” and “middle 1st incorrect answer A1 to 4” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “24” indicates “right middle left middle bell 2” as an internal winning combination, and symbols for which winning is permitted are allowed. As the combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 8”, “middle bell”, “right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 6” and “medium 1st incorrect answer A1 to 4” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the data pointer for small winning combination / replay “25” indicates “middle left bell middle 3” as an internal winning combination, and symbols for which winning is permitted are allowed. As a combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 9”, “middle bell”, “right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 6” and “medium 1st incorrect answer A1 to 4” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination and replay, the data pointer for small winning combination and replay "26" indicates "right middle left middle bell 1" as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (prize operation flag), “upper bell 10”, “middle bell”, “right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 6” and “medium 1st incorrect answer B1 to 4” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “27” indicates “right middle left middle bell 2” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the combination of symbols (prize operation flag), "upper bell 11", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 6" and "medium 1st incorrect answer B1 to 4" are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “28” indicates “right middle left middle bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (prize operation flag), "upper bell 12", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 6" and "medium 1st incorrect answer B1 to 4" are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “29” indicates “middle left and right lower bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bell 1 and 2”, “Lower bell 1 to 3”, “Medium 1st 2nd incorrect solution B 1 to 9”, and “Right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B 1 to 6” are associated as a combination (winning operation flag) of .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “30” indicates “middle left and right lower bell 2” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bells 3 and 4”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, “middle 1st 2nd incorrect solutions B1 to 9”, and “right 1st 2nd incorrect solutions B1 to 6” as combinations (winning operation flags) of .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “31” indicates “middle left and right lower bell 3” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bell 5, 6”, “Lower bell 1 to 3”, “Medium 1st 2nd incorrect solution B 1 to 9”, and “Right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B 1 to 6” are associated as a combination (winning operation flag) of .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "32" indicates "middle right left lower bell 1" as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bells 7 and 8”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, “middle 1st 2nd incorrect solutions B1 to 9”, and “right 1st 2nd incorrect solutions B1 to 6” as combinations (winning operation flags) of .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "33" indicates "middle right left lower bell 2" as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bell 9, 10”, “Lower bell 1 to 3”, “Medium 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1 to 9”, and “Right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6” are associated as a combination (winning operation flag) of .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “34” indicates “middle right left lower bell 3” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bells 11, 12”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, “middle 1st 2nd incorrect solutions B1 to 9”, and “right 1st 2nd incorrect solutions B1 to 6” are associated as combinations (winning operation flags) of .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the data pointer for small winning combination / replay "35" indicates "right lower left middle lower bell 1" as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bell 1 and 2”, “lower bell 1 to 3”, and “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6” are associated with each other as a combination (winning operation flag).

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “36” indicates “right lower left middle lower bell 2” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bells 3 and 4”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, and “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6” are associated with each other as a combination of (combination operation flag).

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “37” indicates “right lower left middle lower bell 3” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bells 5 and 6”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, and “right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6” are associated with each other as a combination (winning operation flag).

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the data pointer for small winning combination / replay “38” indicates “right middle left lower bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the combination of symbols (prize operation flag), "upper bell 7, 8", "lower bell 1 to 3" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6" are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “39” indicates “right middle left lower bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. As the combination of symbols (prize operation flag), "upper bell 9, 10", "lower bell 1 to 3" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6" are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the data pointer for small winning combination / replay "40" indicates "right middle left lower bell 3" as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the combination of symbols (prize operation flag), "upper bells 11, 12", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6" are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “41” indicates “strong bell” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( “Upper bell 1 to 12”, “Cross-up bell 1 to 9”, and “Lower bell 1 to 3” are associated with each other as the winning operation flag).

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “42” indicates “watermelon” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning) As the operation flag, “cross-down watermelon 1 to 4” and “middle watermelon 1 to 6” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “43” indicates “weak cherry” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( As a prize operation flag), "corn cherry A1-1-8", "corn cherry B3-1-4", "corn cherry C1-1-8", "corn cherry C2-1-12", "corn cherry C3 -1 to 6 "," corn cherry C4-1 to 3 "," special role A "," special role B "and" special role C "are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "44" indicates "strong cherry 1" as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "corn cherry A1-1 to 8", "corn cherry B1-1 to 4", "corn cherry B2-1 to 24", "corn cherry B3-1 to 4", "corn cherry B4-1 to 3, "corn cherry B5-1 to 4", "corn cherry C2-1 to 12", "special role A", "special role B" and "special role C" are associated with each other .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “45” indicates “strong cherry 2” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted As the (prize operation flag), "corn cherry A1-1 to 8", "corn cherry B1-1 to 4", "corn cherry B2-1 to 24", "corn cherry B3-1 to 4", "corn cherry B4-1 to "3", "corn cherry B5-1 to 4", "corn cherry C2-1 to 12", "special role A" and "special role C" are associated with each other.

  In addition, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “46” indicates “RB small / medium winning combination A” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of the winning combination is permitted. “Middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1 to 9” is associated as a combination (winning operation flag).

  In addition, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “47” indicates “RB small / medium winning combination B” as an internal winning combination, and a winning combination is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), all small combinations (that is, combinations of all the symbols shown in FIGS. 14a and 14b) are associated.

  Here, referring to the internal lottery table for the RB gaming state shown in FIG. 16, “RB small and medium-sized player A” corresponds to the winning number “1” and internally wins with a winning probability of 39425/65536. On the other hand, referring to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability of “1st 2nd incorrect solution A1 to 9” associated with “RB small and medium winning combination A” is 2734 × 6/65536 = 16404 It is / 65536.

  Further, referring to the internal lottery table for the RB gaming state shown in FIG. 16, “RB small and medium-sized combination B” corresponds to the winning number “2” and is internally won with a winning probability of 16406/65536. On the other hand, referring to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability is the highest among the combinations (winning operation flags) of symbols permitted to be awarded in association with "RB small and medium-sized winning combination B". Is the “cross-up bell 1-9” corresponding to the winning numbers “17” to “22” and “41”, and the winning probability is (2734 × 6 + 1) / 65536 = 16405/65536.

  Therefore, in the RB gaming state, a winning probability higher than that in the normal gaming state, that is, a winning probability more advantageous for the player, is set in a combination of symbol combinations (winning operation flag) in which winning is permitted.

<Internal winning combination determination table for bonus>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, data for identifying an internal winning combination is associated with the bonus data pointer.

  Also, for the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted for the bonus data pointer, and the name (content) of the winning combination and the name of the internal winning combination ( Note) is associated.

  In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "0" is associated with "loss". Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "1" indicates "BB" as an internal winning combination, and "as a winning combination permitted symbol combination (winning operation flag)" “BB” is associated.

[Relationship between stop operation sequence and winning combination for internal winning combination]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the relationship between the stop operation order for the internal winning combination and the winning combination will be described.

  In FIG. 19, as the stop operation order, "left middle right" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17L, the stop button 17C, and the stop button 17R, and the "right and left middle" is the stop button 17L, "Middle left and right" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17C, the stop button 17L, and the stop button 17R. “Right and left” means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17C, the stop button 17R, and the stop button 17L, and the “right and left middle” is the stop operation in the order of the stop button 17R, the stop button 17L, and the stop button 17C. "Right middle left" means stop button 17R, stop button 17C, it means that the order stop operation of the stop buttons 17L is made.

<Overview of Reel Stop>
In the present embodiment, a plurality of combinations of symbols for which winning is permitted is associated with one internal winning combination, and at what timing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated (stop Depending on the operation timing) and in what order the operation is performed (stop operation order), control may be performed so that the finally displayed winning combination is also changed.

  That is, as to which symbol combination the symbol combination finally displayed on the effective line will be (in other words, as the basic information when the main CPU 51 executes the reel stop control), It is determined based on the three elements of

  The first factor is the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "lost" (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is "0"), a combination of symbols pertaining to any replay combination or a combination of symbols pertaining to the small combination Is never displayed on the effective line.

  The second element is the player's stop operation timing (in other words, the position of the symbol when the player operates any stop button). For example, in the present embodiment, since four symbols are determined as the maximum number of sliding symbols, even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process, the winning is permitted thereby. If the symbols that make up the combination of symbols being placed are arranged beyond 4 symbols, the combination of symbols for which winning is permitted may not be displayed depending on the timing of the stop operation of the player . This is called so-called "dropout", and in FIG. 19 that is described as "or lost" means that there is this "drop-out". Therefore, in the same figure, when not written as "or lost", it means that the combination of at least one of the symbols displayed among the displayed winning combinations is displayed, and there is no "dropout". .

  The third element is the player's stop operation order. For example, when the result of the internal lottery process is "normal RIP 1" (small part and replay data pointer value is "1"), regardless of the stop operation order, regardless of the stop operation timing. As shown in FIG. 19, a combination of symbols relating to any of the replay roles is displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, if the result of the internal lottery process is "middle left and right cross-up bell 1" (small part and replay data pointer value is "17"), if the stop operation order is "middle left and right", Regardless of the stop operation timing, when any combination of symbols of "Cross-up bell 1 to 9" is displayed on the effective line and the stop operation order is "middle right left", regardless of the stop operation timing The combination of symbols in any of "Middle 1st 2nd incorrect solutions A1 to 9" is displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, when the stop operation order is "left middle right" or "right and left middle", the stop operation timing is a timing that can display the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of "upper bell 1" on the effective line. In the case where the combination of symbols of “upper bell 1” is displayed on the effective line and the stop operation order is “right / left middle” or “right middle left” only, the stop operation timing is “right 1st incorrect answer”. The combination of any of the symbols on the right 1st incorrect answer A1 to 4 "is on the effective line only when it is the timing that can display the symbols that make up the combination of any of the symbols on A1 to 4" on the effective line Is displayed.

  Here, the internal winning combination "middle left and right cross-up bell 1" (small part · replay data pointer value is "17"), "middle left and right cross-up bell 2" (small part · replay data pointer value is " 18 ")," middle left and right cross-up bell 3 "(small part and replay data pointer value is" 19 ")," middle left and right lower bell 1 "(small part and replay data pointer value is" 29 ") , “Middle left and right lower bell 2” (small part and replay data pointer “30”) and “middle left and right lower bell 3” (small part and replay data pointer “31”) are stopped Focusing on the operation order (refer to FIG. 19), it can be generically referred to as “middle left and right bell” because it is common in that similar benefits can be given.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle left and right bell”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is “middle left and right”. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "middle left and right bell", the stop operation order "middle left and right" is the procedure of the stop operation which is most advantageous for the player.

  Also, the internal winning combination "middle right left cross-up bell 1" (small part · replay data pointer value "20"), "middle right left cross-up bell 2" (small part · replay data pointer value "21 ), "Middle right and left cross-up bell 3" (small part and replay data pointer value is "22"), "middle right and left lower bell 1" (small part and replay data pointer value is "32"), "Middle right left lower bell 2" (small part · replay data pointer value is "33") and "middle right left lower bell 3" (small part · replay data pointer value is "34"), the stop operation Focusing on the order (see FIG. 19), it can be generically referred to as "middle right left bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be given.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is "middle right left bell", seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is "middle right left". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "middle right left bell", the stop operation order "middle right left" is the procedure of the stop operation which is most advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "right left middle middle bell 1" (small part · Replay data pointer value is "23"), "right left middle middle bell 2" (small part · replay data pointer value is "24") , "Right and left middle middle bell 3" (small part and replay data pointer value is "25"), "right and left middle lower bell 1" (small part and replay data pointer value is "35"), "right and left middle The lower bell 2 "(small part and replay data pointer value is" 36 ") and" right and left middle lower bell 3 "(small part and replay data pointer value is" 37 ") has its stop operation order (Fig. 19) can be generically referred to as "right, left, middle, bell" because they are common in that they can provide similar benefits.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is "right and left middle bell", seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is "right and left middle". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "right left middle bell", the stop operation order "right left middle" is the procedure of the stop operation which is most advantageous for the player.

  Also, the internal winning combination "right middle left middle bell 1" (small part · replay data pointer value is "26"), "right middle left middle bell 2" (small part · replay data pointer value is "27 ")," Right middle left middle bell 3 "(small part · replay data pointer value is" 27 ")," right middle left lower bell 1 "(small part · replay data pointer value is" 38 ") , “Right middle left lower bell 2” (small part and replay data pointer value is “39”) and “right middle left lower bell 3” (small part and replay data pointer value is “40”) Focusing on the stop operation order (see FIG. 19), it can be generically referred to as “right middle left bell” because it is common in that similar benefits can be provided.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “right middle left bell”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is “right middle left”. Be Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "right middle left bell", the stop operation order "right middle left" is the procedure of the stop operation which is most advantageous for the player.

  Thus, based on the above-described third factor, the internal winning combination in which the player's profit changes is referred to as a so-called "push order", and in the case of a replay role, it is referred to as "push order replay". In the case of a minor, it may be referred to as a "push order minor."

  In the present embodiment, when the middle and left bells, middle right and left bells, right and left middle bells, and right middle and left bells, which are "push order small part", are determined as internal winning combinations during AT. In addition, it is decided to notify the stop operation order that seven medals will be paid out.

<Composition of push order small part>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the configuration of the push order small part in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. Fig.20 (a) is a figure which shows the structural example of the pushing order small part in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention, (b) is the pushing order small part in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention It is a figure which shows the structural example of the pushing order small part in the case of not applying the structure of.

  In (a) of FIG. 20, "middle left and right bell A" conceptually means "middle left and right cross-up bell 1 to 3" (small part and replay data pointer values are "17" to "19"). “Middle right left bell A” conceptually represents “middle right left cross-up bell 1 to 3” (small part and replay data pointer values “20” to “22”), “right left middle bell “B” conceptually represents “right and left middle bell 1 to 3” (small part and replay data pointer values are “23” to “25”), and “right middle left bell B” is “right middle The left middle bell 1 to 3 (the small pointer and replay data pointer values are “26” to “28”) is conceptually represented, “middle left and right bell C” is “middle left and right lower bell 1 to 3” The value of the small part / replay data pointer conceptually represents “29” to “31”, and “middle right left bell C” Right and left Lower bell 1 to 3 (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is "32" to "34") is conceptually represented, "right and left middle bell C" is "right and left middle lower bell 1 to 3" ( The value of the small part / replay data pointer conceptually represents “35” to “37”, and “right middle left bell C” is “right middle left lower bell 1 to 3” (small part / replay data The value of the pointer conceptually represents “38” to “40”).

  Further, in (a) of FIG. 20, “one question” is “Middle left and right lower bell 1 to 3” (small part and replay data pointer values are “29” to “31,” as shown in FIG. ")," Middle right left lower bell 1-3 "(small part · replay data pointer value is" 32 "to" 34 ")," right left middle lower bell 1-3 "(small part · replay data pointer Values “35” to “37”) and “right middle left lower bell 1 to 3” (small combination and replay data pointer values “38” to “40”) “middle 1st 2nd incorrect solution B 1 to 9” And “right 1st 2nd incorrect solutions B1 to 6” are conceptually represented. In the same manner, "7 pressing order correct right and up 7", "7 pressing order correct middle steps", "7 pressing order correct lower 7", "7 pressing position correct upper row", "1 pressing position correct" and The "one first stop correct answer" is also a conceptual representation of the winning combination shown in FIG.

  In addition, in (b) of FIG. 20, if “right and left middle bell A” is defined as an internal winning combination, “right and left middle cross-up bell 1 to 3” is conceptually represented, and the stop operation is performed. Only when the order is "right and left middle", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the "cross-up bells 1 to 9" is awarded, and seven medals are paid out. Also, if "right middle left bell A" is defined as an internal winning combination, "right middle left cross-up bell 1 to 3" is conceptually represented, and the stop operation order is "right middle left Only when it is "," it means that 7 medals are paid out in any of the "cross-up bells 1 to 9" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. In addition, if "middle left and right bell B" is defined as an internal winning combination, it is a conceptual representation of "middle left and right middle bell 1 to 3" and the stop operation order is "middle left and right". However, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "Middle Bell" is awarded and seven medals are paid out. Also, if "middle right left bell B" is defined as an internal winning combination, it is a conceptual representation of "middle right left middle bell 1 to 3" and the stop operation order is "middle right left". However, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "Middle Bell" is awarded and seven medals are paid out.

  Moreover, in (a) and (b) of FIG. 20, the phrase “pressing position correct” means that the timing of the stop operation was appropriate, that is, “dropout” occurred in the second element described above. It represents that the stop operation was performed without doing. For example, when the stop operation order is “left middle right” or “right and left middle”, “stop position correct answer upper row of seven” is the winning of the stop operation timing among “upper rows bell 1 to 12” ( Only when it is the timing that can be displayed on the effective line the symbols that make up the combination of the symbols pertaining to the "upper bell" that is winning is permitted) (the winning is permitted) "upper bell The symbol combination of "is displayed on the effective line, and represents that seven medals are paid out.

  In addition, in (a) and (b) of FIG. 20, "(1/4)" or "(1/2)" is a design on at least one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. When the stop operation is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing at which one predetermined symbol is displayed on the one reel on the arrangement of the other, other predetermined not displayed depending on the predetermined stop operation timing When symbols exist, the number of predetermined symbols (in other words, the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing) is shown.

  For example, when "upper bell 1 to 12" is considered as one group, in the reel 3L, the "replay" symbol is arranged to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the stop operation timing, and in the reel 3R , "Watermelon A", "watermelon B" and "watermelon C" symbols (one symbol group) are arranged to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. On the other hand, in the reel 3C, "watermelon A" (corresponding to "upper bells 1 to 3", "watermelon C (corresponding to" upper bells 4 to 6 ")," white blank "(" upper bells 7 to 9 " ), “Red 7” (corresponding to “upper bell 10-12”) is the above-mentioned predetermined symbol, and when the stopping operation is performed at the timing of stopping operation to display any of these symbols, the symbol is stopped It is arrange | positioned so that another pattern may not be displayed in operation timing. That is, in the reel 3C, predetermined symbols are arranged such that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is four (see FIGS. 10, 14a and 14b).

  Also, for example, when "middle 1st incorrect answer A1 to A4" and "medium 1st incorrect answer B1 to B4" are considered as one group, in reel 3L, "bell" and "watermelon B" symbols (one symbol group ) Is arranged to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and in the reel 3C, the “cherry” symbol is arranged to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation There is. On the other hand, in the reel 3R, "BAR" (corresponds to "medium 1st incorrect solution A1, A3"), "watermelon A" (corresponds to "medium 1st incorrect solution A2, A4"), "watermelon B" ("medium 1st "Red 7" (corresponds to incorrect answer B1, B3) and "red 7" (corresponds to "middle 1st incorrect answer B2, B4") are the predetermined symbols mentioned above, and stop at the stop operation timing to display any of these symbols When an operation is performed, it is arrange | positioned so that another pattern may not be displayed at the stop operation timing. That is, in the reel 3R, predetermined symbols are arranged such that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is two (see FIGS. 10, 14a and 14b).

  Here, when (a) and (b) of FIG. 20 are compared, in (a) of FIG. 20, while the number of internal winning combinations is eight, in (b) of FIG. The number of winning combinations is 12 and the number of internal winning combinations is to be increased by four. In addition, in (a) of FIG. 20, when it is desired to set the total of the lottery values of the desired push order small part to "4000" (that is, when assigning the lottery value of "1000" to the correct push order). In FIG. 20 (b), the desired lottery value described above can not be evenly assigned, while the lottery value is equally assigned to.

  As described above, according to the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment, the number of internal winning combinations is not made monotonous (the combination of the displayed symbols) in the push order small combination. By reducing the volume of data, it is possible to reduce the control burden of the internal lottery process, and furthermore, it becomes easy to assign desired lottery values evenly, so that the lottery is fair and easy to design. It will also help.

  Also, in FIG. 20A, the lottery values (for example, “250”) of “middle left and right bell C”, “middle right left bell C”, “right left middle bell C” and “right middle left bell C” Instead of making it lower than the lottery value (for example, "750") of "middle left and right bell A", "middle right left bell A", "right left middle bell B" and "right middle left bell B" C), “middle right left bell C”, “right left middle bell C” or “right middle left bell C”, even if the stop operation order becomes incorrect by any stop operation order, “dropout” "" Does not occur, "one question" will be awarded, and one medal will be paid out, but in (b) of FIG. 20, the stop operation order of the first stop operation is incorrect. As long as there is, there is always the possibility of "dropouts."

  As described above, according to the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment, in the push order small combination in which the lottery value is relatively lowered, the stop operation order is always incorrect even if the stop operation order becomes incorrect. By giving the player a minimum benefit, as a result, it is possible to reduce the bias of the benefit given to the player, which also contributes to the fairness of the game.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the push order small combination concerning this embodiment was demonstrated using FIG. 20, the structure of the push order small combination concerning this embodiment is not restricted to this. For example, in the configuration of the push order small winning combination according to the present embodiment, when the stop operation order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", the case where the push order is correct is not provided. It is also possible to provide a correct answer.

  In this case, "left middle right bell D" and "left right middle bell D" are defined, and when "left middle right bell D" is won, the stop operation is performed only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Regardless of the timing, it is decided that one of the “upper bell 1 to 12” is won, 7 medals are paid out, and the stop operation order is “right to left” at the time of “right to left middle bell D”. In any case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the “upper bells 1 to 12” may be awarded, and seven medals may be paid out. Furthermore, when "left middle right bell C" and "left middle right bell C" are defined, and when "left middle right bell C" is won, the timing of the stop operation is determined only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Regardless of the case, it is determined that one of the lower bells 1 to 3 is awarded and seven medals are paid out, and the stop operation order is “right and left middle” at the time of winning “right and left middle bell C”. As long as it is determined that any of the lower bells 1 to 3 wins and seven medals are paid out, regardless of the timing of the stop operation. In addition, the "one question", "one correct answer at the pressing position" and the "one correct answer at the first stop" may be configured in the same manner as described above.

  Also, for example, it is assumed that the medals of “7 sheets” at the correct order of push and “one sheet” are dispelled at the incorrect order of push, but at the correct order of push, the number of medals inserted is three or more. The number of medals equal to or less than the prescribed number (15) may be paid out, and the number can be set as appropriate. Further, when the pushing order is incorrect, it is sufficient if the number of medals which is one or more and less than the number of inserted medals (three) is paid out, and the number can be set appropriately. Furthermore, when the pressing order is incorrect, the number of medals less than the number of medals paid out when the pressing order is correct may be paid out.

<Stop control of reel>
The main CPU 51 executes the following processing in order to realize the above-described stop control of the reels.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines an internal winning combination in an internal lottery process (see S14 in FIG. 42) to be described later, and stores information on the internal winning combination in the main RAM 53. In S42 (see S16), various stop control information stored in the main ROM 52 is read out and stored in the main RAM 53 based on the internal winning combination.

  Here, if information stored as various stop control information is illustrated, at which symbol position on each reel at which the stop button is operated is stopped at which symbol position in relation to the above-mentioned second element ( In relation to the information specifying the number of sliding pieces directly or indirectly or in relation to the above-mentioned third element, when the stop button is operated in which stop operation sequence, which symbol combination is preferentially displayed It is possible to cite information that directly or indirectly defines the parameter.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stops each reel based on various stop control information stored in the main RAM 53 in a reel stop control process (see S22 of FIG. 42) described later. In particular, when the internal winning combination is a "push advance role", appropriate stop control information is selected from among the stored stop control information or one stop operation is performed according to the stop operation order. After that, stop control information is generated (changed) to perform stop control.

  Depending on the stop operation timing and the stop operation order, different stop controls may be executed even if they are the same internal winning combination, but the stop control is uniquely determined in advance and the same. The same stop control is executed as long as the internal winning combination and the same stop operation timing and stop operation sequence are performed.

[Configuration of storage area allocated to main RAM]
Next, configurations of various storage areas allocated to the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 21 is constituted by 27 storage areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 27. The internal winning combination storing area is configured to be able to store data (bits) corresponding to the combination of each symbol specified in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, and as a result of internal lottery processing, winning is achieved. "1" is set to data (bit) according to the combination of symbols permitted, and "0" is set to data (bit) according to the combination of symbols not winning.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storing area shown in FIG. 22 is formed of 27 storage areas of the display combination storing areas 1 to 27. The display combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the above-mentioned internal winning combination storage area, and as a result of the internal lottery process, of the combinations of symbols for which winning is permitted, symbols that can be displayed on the effective line "1" is set to data (bit) corresponding to the combination, and "0" is set to data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can not be displayed. Also, in the display combination storing area, whenever the respective reels of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R stop, the data (bit) is updated based on the data (bit) stored in the symbol code storage area described later The combination of symbols in which "1" is set even after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have stopped is a winning combination. That is, the display combination storing area is used for the main CPU 51 to identify a winning combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

<Symbol code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 23 is composed of 27 storage areas of symbol code storage areas 1 to 27. The symbol code storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storing area and the display combination storing area described above, and is effective among combinations of the symbols specified in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14. The data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the line is set to "1", and the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can not be displayed is "0". Is set. Further, in the symbol code storage area, the data (bit) is updated each time the respective reels of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R stop.

<Holding part storage area>
In the carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 24, data relating to the carryover combination is stored. For example, when the BB carryover state is reached (that is, when "BB" is determined as the internal winning combination), bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area is set to "1", and "BB" is won to be BB. When shifting to the gaming state, the corresponding bit is reset to "0".

<Playing state flag storage area>
The gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 25 stores data relating to the BB gaming state, the RB gaming state, and the RT gaming state. For example, in the BB gaming state, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1", and bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1".

  In addition, when the RT gaming state becomes the RT1 gaming state, bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1”, and the RT gaming state becomes the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state flag storage area Bit 2 is reset to '0'.

  In the following description, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is also referred to as "BB gaming state flag", bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is also referred to as "RB gaming state flag", and bits of the gaming state flag storage area 2 is also referred to as "RT1 gaming state flag".

<Actual stop button storage area>
In the operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 26, the states of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are stored. Bit 0 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and when the stop button 17L is operated, "1" is stored in bit 0.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and "1" is stored in bit 1 when the stop button 17C is operated. Also, bit 2 corresponds to the stop button 17R, and "1" is stored in bit 2 when the stop button 17R is operated.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and when the stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in the bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and when the stop button 17C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 5. The bit 6 corresponds to the stop button 17R, and when the stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in the bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, the effective stop button corresponds to the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of detecting the stop operation by the main CPU 51.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 27 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order "left → middle → right", and "1" is stored in bit 0 when the pressing order is "left → middle → right", and the other bits are "0". It is reset.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the pressing order "left → right → middle", bit 2 corresponds to the pressing order "middle → left → right", and bit 3 corresponds to the pressing order "middle → right → left" The bit 4 corresponds to the pressing order "right → left → middle", and the bit 5 corresponds to the pressing order "right → middle → left".

<Effect game state storage area>
The effect game state storage area shown in FIG. 28 is an area for storing the effect game state managed by the main control side (that is, the main CPU 51). Bit 0 corresponds to "main CZ state 1" in the effect game state, and "1" is stored in bit 0 when the effect game state is "main CZ state 1".

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the effect game state "main CZ state 2", bit 2 corresponds to the effect game state "pseudo probability state 1", and bit 3 corresponds to the effect game state "pseudo probability state 2" In the bit 4, the effect game state corresponds to the "AT in progress state". In addition, when all the bits are “0”, the effect game state corresponds to the “normal game state”. The details of each effect game state will be described later.

[Configuration of various lottery tables used for effects etc.]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 37, configurations of various lottery tables used for effect and the like will be described.

<Reel action lottery table for main CZ state>
FIG. 29 is a view showing the reel action lottery table for the main CZ state stored in the main ROM 52. As shown in FIG. The main CZ state reel action lottery table is referred to in the normal game lottery process described later in the description of FIG. 48, and each of the effect game states is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2”. It is used in order to decide the reel action which is the production with the design fluctuation feature which is indicated in reel 3L, 3C and 3R.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the main CZ state reel action lottery table, whether the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (type of main CZ state) and main CZ state The reel action of one of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined based on the value of the CZ game number counter indicating the number of stay games for which the game is staying and which internal winning combination has been determined. The lottery value is assigned to

  For example, when the effect game state is "main CZ state 1", the value of the CZ game number counter is "1", and the internal winning combination is "replay", the reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 32768/65536. And the reel action 3 is determined with the probability of 8192/65536, the reel action 4 is determined with the probability of 23808/65536, the reel action 5 is determined with the probability of 256/65536, and the reel action 6 with the probability of 256/65536 Is determined, and the reel action 8 is determined with a probability of 256/65536.

  Also, for example, when the effect game state is “main CZ state 1”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “8”, and the internal winning combination is “replay”, the reel action 2 with a probability of 64512/65536 Is determined, the reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 512/65536, and the reel action 6 is determined with a probability of 512/65536.

  Also, for example, when the effect game state is "main CZ state 2", the value of the CZ game number counter is "1 to 7" or "8", and the internal winning combination is "replay", 52428/65536 The reel action 2 is determined with the probability of, the reel action 5 is determined with the probability of 6554/65536, and the reel action 6 is determined with the probability of 6554/65536.

  Also, for example, the reel action 1 is a symbol variation mode in which forward rotation (normal rotation) is started after each reel reversely rotates by one step, and the reel action 2 is forward after the two reels rotate reversely. The reel action 3 is a symbol variation mode in which rotation (normal rotation) is started, and the reel action 3 is a symbol variation mode in which forward rotation (normal rotation) is started after each reel reverse rotates three steps. The symbol variation mode is to start the forward rotation (normal rotation) after the reels reverse rotate four steps, and the reel actions 5 and 7 start the forward rotation (normal rotation) after the respective reels rotate five steps backward In the symbol variation mode, the reel actions 6 and 8 may be symbol variation modes in which each reel is reversely rotated by six steps and then forward rotation (normal rotation) is started. Reel actions 5 and 6 are different in that the effect by the symbol variation mode is performed in the unit game while the reel actions 7 and 8 are different in that the effect by the symbol variation mode is performed in the next unit game It has become.

  Further, as described later in the description of FIG. 51, when the reel game 3 or 4 is executed when the effect game state is "main CZ state 1", the effect game state is "main CZ from the next unit game. When the effect gaming state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2", the reel actions 5 to 8 are executed as described later with reference to FIG. 74. The AT game is configured to start from the next unit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the main CZ state, one reel action is determined and executed out of a plurality of reel actions in different stages of reverse rotation, so that the reel action is performed. The player's sense of expectation when being executed can be gradually improved, and the degree of advantage and the number of reverse rotation stages are synchronized, which is an advantage for the player The degree can be intuitively grasped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the value of the CZ game number counter is more than when the effect game state is "main CZ state 1" and the value of the CZ game number counter is "1 to 7". The probability that AT game is started (probability that any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is determined) is relatively higher when “8” is “8”. That is, since the number of continued games in the CZ state is eight (see FIG. 51), in the main CZ state, the final game is configured to be most advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the probability that AT game is started is more likely to be started when the effect gaming state is "main CZ state 2" than when the effect gaming state is "main CZ state 1" (reel The probability that one of the actions 5 to 8 is determined is relatively high. That is, in the main CZ state, the player is more advantageous when the effect gaming state is the "main CZ state 2" than when the effect gaming state is the "main CZ state 1". It is done.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the reel action 3 or 4 is executed in the main CZ state, the effect game state is shifted from the "main CZ state 1" to the "main CZ state 2" In "CZ state 2", since the probability that AT game is started (probability that any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is determined) is relatively high, the aspect of the reel action is diversified To improve the interest of the game, and to prevent a reduction in the sense of expectation in the main CZ state, even when the reel action (reel action 5 to 8) for starting the AT game is not determined. Can.

  In FIGS. 29 to 37, the internal winning combination "Replay" refers to "normal lips 1 to 4" and "bell lip 1 to 4", and the internal winning combination "bell" refers to "middle left and right cross up bell 1 "3", "middle right left cross-up bell 1 to 3", "right left middle middle bell 1 to 3", "right middle left middle bell 1 to 3", "middle left and right lower bell 1 to 3", "middle right left lower "Bell 1-3", "right and left middle lower bell 1 to 3" and "right middle left lower bell 1 to 3", the internal winning combination "chance role" is "chance lip 1", "chance lip 2" and "Strong chance lip" refers to internal winning combination "watermelon" refers to "watermelon", internal winning combination "weak cherry" refers to "weak cherry", internal winning combination "strong cherry" is "strong cherry 1 and “strong cherry 2” but not limited thereto For example, the reel action lottery may be performed on all or part of the internal winning combinations shown in FIGS. 17 and 18.

<Simulation number of times lottery table>
(A) of FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a pseudo game frequency lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. As shown in FIG. This pseudo game frequency lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during pseudo probability change state to be described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 1” or “pseudo probability change state 2”, the pseudo game count Is used to determine the

  As shown in (a) of FIG. 30, in the pseudo game frequency lottery table, the effect gaming state is either “pseudo probability variation state 1” or “pseudo probability variation state 2” (type of pseudo probability variation state) The lottery value is assigned such that one of the pseudo game numbers of 0 to 10 is determined.

  For example, when the effect gaming state is "pseudo probability state 1", the number of times of simulated gaming is determined at a probability of 164/256, and the number of simulated gamings is determined at a probability of 40/256, and 40/256 The probability of 2 pseudo games is determined, the probability of 6/256 is 5 times of pseudo games, and the probability of 6/256 is 10 times of pseudo games.

  Also, for example, when the effect game state is “pseudo probability state 2”, the number of times of pseudo game is determined with probability of 32/256, and the number of times of pseudo game is determined with probability of 64/256, 64 / The number of pseudo games is determined 3 times with a probability of 256, the number of pseudo games played is determined with a probability of 64/256, the number of pseudo games played 5 times with a probability of 16/256, and simulated with a probability of 16/256 The number of games is determined 10 times.

  If one or more is determined as the number of pseudo games, as described later in the explanation of FIG. 74, the pseudo internal winning combination is determined, and the AT number is added (superposed) based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. It will be done.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30, the probability that the number of times of pseudo game is given in the case where the effect game state is "pseudo probability change state 2" than in the case where the effect game state is "pseudo probability state 1" Is relatively high. That is, in the pseudo probability change state, the player is more advantageous in the case where the effect gaming state is the "false probability change state 2" than in the case where the effect game state is the "false probability change state 1". It is done.

<Simulation internal winning combination lottery table>
(B) of FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a pseudo internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This pseudo internal winning combination lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during pseudo probability variation state described later in the description of FIG. 47 and in the game start lock execution processing described later in the description of FIG. 49, and the effect gaming state is “pseudo probability state 1 Or “pseudo probability variation state 2” and is used to determine a simulated internal winning combination when the number of simulated games is one or more.

  As shown in (b) of FIG. 30, in the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table, weak cherries are determined as pseudo internal winning combinations with a probability of 128/256, and strong cherries as pseudo internal winning combinations with a probability of 64/256. The lottery value is assigned such that the watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256, and the chance combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256.

  In addition, the simulated internal winning combination is simulated in each reel 3L, based on the player's operation on the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R (pseudo stop operation) in a pseudo game executed during locking at the game start. It is used to stop 3C and 3R. For example, when a weak cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the symbol of "cherry" is pseudo stopped at the lower end of the left reel 3L, the lower end of the middle reel 3C, and the upper end of the right reel 3R. When a strong cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the symbol of "cherry" is pseudo stopped at the lower end of the left reel 3L, the lower end of the middle reel 3C and the lower end of the right reel 3R. When a watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the symbol of "watermelon" is pseudo stopped at the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. If the chance role is determined as a simulated internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the "Replay" symbol is suspected in the middle of the left reel 3L and in the middle of the middle reel 3C. Is stopped, the symbol "cherry" is controlled to stop pseudo the middle of the right reel 3R. From this, it can be said that the simulated internal winning combination is a reel action.

<Highly accurate migration lottery table>
(C) of FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the high-accuracy transfer lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This high probability transition lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during the pseudo probability change state described later in the description of FIG. 47, and is the shift to the “pseudo probability change state 2” when the effect gaming state is the “pseudo probability change state 1”? It is used to determine whether or not.

  As shown in (c) of FIG. 30, when the internal winning combination is "Replay", the high probability transition lottery table is maintained at the probability of 255/256 (that is, it does not shift to "pseudo probability state 2") ) Is determined, the high probability transition (that is, transition to “pseudo probability state 2”) is determined with a probability of 1/256, and the probability of 256/256 when the internal winning combination is “watermelon” The lottery values are assigned such that a high probability transition (that is, transition to “pseudo probability state 2”) is determined (that is, 100% probability).

<Highly secured obstacle game number lottery table>
(D) of FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a high securing failure game number lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This high securing failure game number lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during pseudo probability variation state described later in the description of FIG. 47, and in the “pseudo probability variation state 2”, when the effect gaming state shifts to the “pseudo probability variation state 2”. Used to determine the number of unit games that can play the pseudo game (that is, the number of times the lock is executed during the “pseudo probability change state 2” in the game start lock execution process described later in FIG. 49) Be

  As shown in (d) of FIG. 30, in the high securing failure game number lottery table, the high securing failure game number 3 times is determined with a probability of 164/256, and the high securing failure game number 4 with a probability of 60/256. Is determined, the high secured failure game number 5 is determined with the probability of 24/256, and the lottery value is assigned such that the high secured failure game number 10 is determined with the probability of 8/256.

<Pseudo probability change state end lottery table>
(E) of FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a pseudo probability change state end lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. This pseudo probability change state end lottery table is referred to in the pseudo probability change state processing which will be described later in the description of FIG. 71, and in the case where the effect gaming state is the “false count state 1”, the “false” managed by the sub CPU 81 The value is used to determine whether or not to end the pseudo-probability state when the value of the pseudo-probability state management counter, which is the number of guaranteed games in the probability state 1, is "0".

  As shown in (e) of FIG. 30, when the internal winning combination is "Replay", the pseudo probability variation state termination lottery table ends the probability variation end (that is, terminates the "pseudo probability variation state 1") with a probability of 8192/32768. The probability of 24576/32768 is determined when it is determined that the probability variation continuation (that is, not ending “pseudo-determination state 1”) is determined with the probability of 24576/32768, and the internal winning combination is “bell”. Lottery so that the end of probability change (ie, ending “pseudo-determination state 1”) is determined and the probability change continuation (ie, “termination of“ pseudo-determination state 1 ”) is determined with the probability of 8192/32768. A value has been assigned.

  As described later in the description of FIG. 52, “pseudo-probability state 1” is actually terminated based on winning in “Bell lip”, but in the present embodiment, by sub CPU 81 When the above-mentioned definite variation end is determined, the stop operation order ("Berlip" becomes a winning combination when either "Normal Lip 1 to 4" or "Bell Lip 1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination) By notifying [see FIG. 19], "Berlip" is made to be a prize, and the "pseudo-probability state 1" is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the pseudo probability variation state management counter is not “0”, and the above-mentioned probability variation continuation is determined by the sub CPU 81, either “Normal Lip 1 to 4” or “Bell Lip 1 to 4” is an internal winning combination. When it is determined that “Berlip” does not become a winning combination, it is configured to continue the “pseudo-determination state 1” without notifying “Bellrip” by notifying the stop operation order (see FIG. 19). There is.

  However, the main CPU 51 may manage the end and continuation of the “pseudo-probability state 1” as well as the “pseudo-probability state 2”. Specifically, the main CPU 51 manages the pseudo probability change state management counter, and based on the value of the pseudo probability change state management counter becoming "0", the effect game state is changed from "pseudo probability change state 1" to "during AT" It is sufficient to shift to the state.

<Reel action lottery table for final combination>
FIG. 31 is a view showing a reel combination lottery table for final combination stored in the main ROM 52. As shown in FIG. The reel action lottery table for a winning combination is referred to in the lottery process during the normal game to be described later in the description of FIG. 48, and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R when the internal winning combination is the “final combination”. It is used to determine the special reel action that is the effect according to the symbol variation mode. Here, the "decision player" means a player who decides that AT game is to be started, and in the present embodiment, "cherry lip", "strong cherry lip" and "strong bell" (see FIG. 17). ) Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the final combination reel action lottery table is such that any special reel action of special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined based on which final combination is the internal combination winning combination. A lottery value has been assigned.

  When the internal winning combination is "cherry lip", special reel action 1 is determined with a probability of 128/256, special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 43/256, and special reel action 3 with a probability of 42/256. Is determined, and the special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 43/256.

  Also, when the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip", special reel action 1 is not determined, special reel action 2 is determined with probability 85/256, and special reel action 3 is determined with probability 86/256. The special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 85/256.

  Also, when the internal winning combination is "strong bell", the special reel actions 1 and 3 are not determined, the special reel action 2 is determined with the probability of 128/256, and the special reel action 4 is determined with the probability of 128/256. It is determined.

  Further, for example, the special reel action 1 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are reversely rotated in order, and the right reel 3R is not rotated reversely but normal rotation is started. The reel action 2 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are reversely rotated in this order and then the forward rotation (normal rotation) is started. The special reel action 3 is the left reel 3L. It is a symbol variation mode in which the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are reversely rotated in this order, and then all reels are further aligned and reversely rotated once and then the forward rotation (normal rotation) is started. It is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, the right reel 3R are reversely rotated in this order, and then all reels are further aligned twice and then reversely rotated to start forward rotation (normal rotation). It can be a thing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 31 and described later with reference to FIG. 74, when the special reel action 1 is determined, the addition fails, and the number of ATs (value of the AT number difference sheet counter) is not added. When the special reel actions 2 to 4 are determined, the addition is successful, and the number of ATs corresponding to the type of the special reel action is added. Specifically, when the special reel action 2 is determined, “300” is added to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter, and when the special reel action 3 is determined, the AT management difference sheet When "400" is added to the value of the counter and the special reel action 4 is determined, "500" is added to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter.

  In the present embodiment, even when the internal winning combination is "cherry lip", the "cherry" symbol is displayed for the left reel 3L even when the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip". When the stop button 17L is operated at the stop operation timing, the "Cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle of the left reel 3L, and the stop control for winning "Cherry Lip A" is performed. On the other hand, with regard to the right reel 3R, the stop control is configured to be different between when the internal winning combination is "Cherry lip" and when the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip".

  Specifically, for example, when the symbol "BAR" is displayed on each reel, if the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip", if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop operation timing, The reels are stopped at the position of the symbol position data "12" in the middle of the left reel 3L, the position of the symbol position data "10" in the middle of the middle reel 3C and the position of the symbol position data "13" in the middle of the right reel 3R If the internal winning combination is "Cherry lip", even if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop operation timing, the symbol position data is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L. The position of symbol position data "10" can be stopped and displayed at the position of symbol position data "10" at the position of symbol position data "10" at the position of symbol position data "13". And it is configured so that it can not be displayed.

  Here, when the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip", as described above, since the special reel actions 2 to 4 are always determined, the addition success is determined while the internal winning combination is " In the case of "Cherry lip", as described above, since the special reel action 1 may be determined, it is a probability of 1/2 whether it is successful or not, so the internal winning combination is " Whether it is "strong cherry lip" or "cherry lip" is an event of high interest to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "BAR" symbol is watched on at least each reel, the internal winning combination is "a strong cherry by changing the stop mode of the symbol stopped and displayed on each reel. The "rip" or "cherry lip" is configured to be recognizable before the special reel action is performed. With such a configuration, the player who wishes to quickly recognize the type of the fixed combination recognizes the type before the special reel action is executed by looking at the "BAR" symbol on each reel. It will be possible. On the other hand, the player who wants to recognize whether the special reel action results in the addition success can continue playing a game by continuing the sense of expectation by not performing the above-described look-ahead. That is, since it is possible to notify whether the addition is successful or not by the notification form and timing desired by the player, it is possible to perform notification in accordance with the preference of the player regarding notification of the addition.

<Mode suggestive effect lottery table>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the mode suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. As shown in FIG. This mode suggestive effect lottery table is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the explanation of FIG. 72, and in order to determine the mode suggestive effect for suggesting the mode which has been determined in the first game after the AT game is over. Used for

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the mode suggestion effect lottery table, the lottery value is set so that one of mode suggestion effects of mode suggestion effects 1 to 9 is determined based on which mode the current mode is. It is assigned.

  When the current mode is "mode A", mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 6552/32768, mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and mode suggestion effect 3 with a probability of 6554/32768 Is determined, the mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with the probability of 6554/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with the probability of 6554/32768.

  Also, when the current mode is "mode B", the mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 7476/32768, the mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and the mode suggestion with a probability of 6554/32768 The effect 3 is determined, the mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with the probability of 4096/32768, the mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with the probability of 3276/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 6 is determined with the probability of 3276/32768, 1024 / The mode suggestion effect 7 is determined with the probability of 32768, and the mode suggestion effect 8 is determined with the probability of 512/32768.

  Also, when the current mode is "mode C", the mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with the probability of 9728/32768, the mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with the probability of 8192/32768, and the mode suggestion with the probability of 4096/32768 The effect 3 is determined, the mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with the probability of 4096/32768, the mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with the probability of 2048/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 6 is determined with the probability of 2048/32768, 1024 / The mode suggestion effect 7 is determined with the probability of 32768, the mode suggestion effect 8 is determined with the probability of 1024/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 9 is determined with the probability of 512/32768.

  Here, the mode is used to determine the number of ceiling games next time, as will be described later in the description of FIG. Mode A is the most disadvantageous mode for the player, and the probability that 1000 games are selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than that in mode B. Mode B is more advantageous than mode A, and the probability that 240 games are selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than that in mode A. Mode C is the most advantageous mode for the player, and the number of ceiling games is always selected within 100 games.

  That is, when the mode suggestion effects 6 to 8 are determined, it is determined that the current mode is the mode B or the mode C, and when the mode suggestion effect 9 is determined, the current mode Since it is determined that the mode C is, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.

  In addition, since the mode suggestion effect is performed in the first game after the AT game is over, it is possible to reduce the decline in the gaming motivation due to the completion of the AT game.

<Remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. As shown in FIG. The number-of-remaining-games suggestion effect lottery table is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the description of FIG. 72, and the number of remaining games until AT game starts (that is, ceiling games) It is used to determine the number of remaining game suggestions to indicate the number of games up to the number).

  As shown in FIG. 33, the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effect lottery table has the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effect of any of the number-of-remaining games suggestion 1 to 10 based on which range the current number of remaining games is. Lottery values are assigned as determined.

  For example, when the current number of remaining games is "11 to 30" games, the remaining game number suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, The remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, 2000/32768 The remaining game number suggestion effect 7 is determined with the probability of 32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 8 is determined with the probability of 9300/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 9 is determined with the probability of 9300/32768, and 9300/32768 The remaining game number suggestion effect 10 is determined by the probability.

  Also, for example, when the current number of remaining games is "31 to 50" games, the remaining game number suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. The remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, The remaining game number suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 9 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, 9300 / The remaining game number suggestion effect 10 is determined with the probability of 32768.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 33, when the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effect 1 is determined and executed, the number of remaining games is “1 to 10” games or “11 to 30” games (ie, the remaining 30 If it is determined that the game is within the game, and the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effect 2 is determined and executed, the number of remaining games is “31 to 50”, “51 to 100” or “101 to 240” ( That is, when it is determined that the remaining 31 games or more and within 240 games) and the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effect 3 is determined and executed, the number of remaining games is “1 to 10”, “11 to 30” Since it is determined that “31 to 50”, “51 to 100” or “101 to 240” (ie, the remaining 240 games are left), if the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effects 1 to 3 are executed, The player is the number of remaining games Less it (ie, the start of the next AT game to be close) can be directly recognized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33, when one of the remaining game number suggestion effects 8 to 10 is determined and executed, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of remaining games.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the probability that the specific remaining game number suggestion effect is executed in a certain remaining game number range is determined as the specific remaining game number suggestion effect in the other remaining game number range. By making the number of remaining games decrease by making the probability of being executed higher or lower than the probability of being executed It is decided to add a new game feature that makes it possible to guess the number of remaining games.

  A specific example will be described using FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of estimating the number of remaining games by the indication of the number of remaining games in the pachislot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  For example, the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is executed with a probability of 2000/32768 when the current remaining game number is in the range of "31 to 50" or "101 to 240", and the current remaining game number is " It is executed with a probability of 300/32768 when it is in the range of “241 to”, and is executed with a probability of 100/32768 when it is in the range of the remaining number of games. If executed, it can be estimated that the number of remaining games is likely to be in the range of “31 to 50” or “101 to 240”, but may also be in the range of “241 to” It can be guessed.

  In this case, when none of the remaining game number suggesting effects 4 to 7 is executed at the time of execution of the plurality of remaining game number suggesting effects thereafter, there is a possibility that the remaining game number is still in the range of “241 to”. Can be estimated as high. On the other hand, when one of the remaining game number suggestion effects 4 to 7 is executed, as shown in FIG. 34, the range of the remaining game number is narrowed down according to the type of the remaining game number hint effect performed. It is possible to guess. In addition, when one of the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effects 1 to 3 is executed, as described above, it can be definitely recognized that the number of remaining games is small.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games until transition to the AT game is possible by executing the suggested number of remaining games every time ten games are played in the normal game. New playability of guessing can be added. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and reduce the decrease in the operation of the game machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of games played in the normal game increases, the effect to suggest the number of remaining games is executed. Therefore, the number of remaining games is more accurately determined by the player who has the number of games played. Can be promoted to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when estimating the number of remaining games before transition to AT gaming is possible, there may be cases where it can be estimated by the execution of one remaining game number suggestive effect, or a plurality of remaining games. Since it may be possible to guess by the execution of the number suggestion effect, it becomes possible to dramatically improve the interest of the remaining game number suggestion effect itself.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the determination on the number-of-remaining games is performed with the lottery probability as described above, it is monotonous in estimating the number of remaining games before the transition to the AT game becomes possible. Can be prevented, and the gameplay can be made more diverse.

  In addition, as for the presentation data which concerns on the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effects 4 to 7, it is desirable to set the presentation data having at least some relationship with each other. For example, the effect data relating to the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is effect data displayed as “close?”, And the effect data relating to the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is displayed as “it should be close ...” Effect data, and effect data relating to the remaining game number indication effect 6 is effect data displayed as “It should be soon!”, And effect data relating to the remaining game number indication effect 7 is “immediately near It can be effect data displayed as “!”.

  Further, for example, the effect data relating to the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is effect data displayed as “Where is the character A?”, And the effect data relating to the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is “place a or place It is the effect data displayed as it should be in b! and the effect data concerning the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is the effect data displayed as "Let's find the place a!" The effect data relating to the effect 7 can be effect data that is displayed as "Let's find a place b!".

<AT middle point addition lottery table>
FIG. 35 shows an AT middle point addition lottery table stored in sub ROM 82. Referring to FIG. This AT middle point addition lottery table is referred to in the processing at the time of start command reception described later in the explanation of FIG. 69, and when any of "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination during AT game, It is used to determine whether or not to cumulatively add points during AT.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the mid-AT point addition lottery table determines either maintenance (not winning) or addition (winning) based on the current point value (ie, the value of the current mid-AT point counter). The lottery value is assigned as it is.

  When the current point value is "0", maintenance (not winning) is determined with a probability of 26214/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 6554/32768. Also, when the current point value is “1”, maintenance (not winning) is determined with the probability of 27646/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with the probability of 5120/32768.

  Also, when the current point value is “2”, maintenance (not winning) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768. Also, when the current point value is "3", maintenance (not winning) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768.

<AT addition count random determination table during superimposition state>
FIG. 36 is a view showing the AT-number-added-addition lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82 during the addition state. The addition AT number addition lottery table during the addition state is referred to in the addition state processing described later in the description of FIG. 70, and the value of the addition state point counter mentioned later becomes “100” or more during the addition state. , And is used to determine an AT count addition value which is a value to be added to the AT management difference sheet counter.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the addition state AT number addition lottery table, the AT number addition value is determined based on the addition state management counter value indicating the number of stay games in the addition state. The lottery value is assigned to. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the AT number addition lottery from becoming monotonous in the additional state, and to maintain the interest of the game even in the case of being repeatedly controlled to be in the additional state.

  For example, when the additional state management counter value is “9” (the first game in the additional state except when the additional state is introduced), the difference number of 50 sheets as the AT number addition value with the probability of 29492/32768 (the difference for AT management) It is determined that "50" is added to the sheet number counter, and 100 difference sheets ("100" to be added to the AT number difference sheet counter for AT management) is determined as the AT number addition value with a probability of 3276/32768.

  In addition, for example, when the addition status management counter value is “5” (5th game in addition status, except when the addition status is introduced), the difference count 20 for the AT count addition value with a probability of 20276/32768 (AT management It is decided to add "20" to the difference sheet counter for use, and with a probability of 8192/32768, it is decided to add 30 sheets for the difference sheet number (add "30" to the difference sheet counter for AT management) as the AT number addition value. At a probability of 3276/32768, 50 difference sheets (adding “50” to the AT management difference sheet counter) is determined as the AT number addition value, and the difference number 100 as the AT number addition value with the probability of 1024/32768. The number of sheets (to add "100" to the AT number difference sheet counter) is determined.

  In addition, for example, when the added state management counter value is “0” (10 added games in addition to the added state, the number of AT times added value is 30 differences as a probability of 24166/32768 (AT management) "30" is decided to be added to the difference sheet counter for the counter, and 50 sheets for the difference sheet number (adding "50" to the difference sheet counter for AT management) is decided as the AT number addition value with a probability of 6554/32768. With a probability of 2048/32768, 100 difference sheets (adding "100" to the difference sheet counter for AT management) is determined as the AT number addition value.

  In the present embodiment, difference sheet number management is adopted as a method of management of the number of ATs. Here, with the difference number management, when any small winning combination is won in the unit game and the medals are paid out, the medals inserted in the unit game from the number of paid out sheets (for example, seven sheets) A value (for example, 7−3 = 4) obtained by subtracting the number of inserted sheets (for example, 3 sheets), which is the number of sheets, is subtracted from the difference sheet counter (for example, difference sheet counter for AT management) When the value of the number counter becomes 0 or less, the AT game is ended.

  However, in the present embodiment, the AT management method is not limited to the above-described difference sheet number management, and, for example, a game number management method for managing the number of AT game games, a push order combination A method of managing the number of notification times, a method of managing the number of sets by managing a predetermined number of games as one set, or a method of continuation rate management of managing the continuation rate at which AT gaming continues, or Combinations can also be employed. That is, in the case of "overlaying" the "number of ATs", in addition to adding the difference number to the difference number counter, the number of games in which AT gaming is performed is added, and the number of times the push order is notified is added. It is assumed that the number of sets is added, the continuation rate is reset, or the continuation rate is set high, or a combination thereof.

<Point addition lottery table during superimposition state>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a point addition random determination table stored in the sub ROM 82 during the addition state. This additional point in-addition point addition lottery table is referred to in the in-addition state processing described later in the description of FIG. 70, and determines a point addition value which is a value to be added to each game in the additional state and the in-addition point counter. Used for The point counter in the additional state is cumulatively added with the point addition value during the additional state, and when the value of the point counter in the additional state becomes "100" or more, the above-described AT number of times is added and the additional state is performed again. Can be done from the beginning (continue).

  As shown in FIG. 37, in the additional state, the point addition random determination table is randomly selected so that one of the point addition values 1 to 100 is determined based on which internal winning combination is determined. A value has been assigned.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is "replay", one of the point addition values 1 to 5 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, and one of the point addition values 6 to 10 is determined with a probability of 1024/32768. , One of the point addition values 11 to 15 is determined with the probability of 819/32768, one of the point addition values 16 to 20 is determined with the probability of 163/32768, and the point addition value 21 to 21 with the probability of 81/32768. One of 32 is determined, one of the point addition values 34 to 36 is determined with the probability of 8/32768, and one of the point addition values 72 to 76 is determined with the probability of 2 of 32768, 1/32768 One of the point addition values 78 to 100 is determined by the probability. In addition, although description is abbreviate | omitted about the point addition value 37-72, any lottery value including 0 shall be allocated.

  Further, the first additional state and the second additional state are provided as the additional state, and in the first additional state, the point addition value is lottery using the point addition lottery table in the additional state shown in FIG. In the additional state, it is possible to perform lottery of the point addition value using the point-in-addition addition lottery table with different addition values of the lottery value. In this case, in the second addition state, the addition state middle point addition lottery table assigns a lottery value so that the point addition value provided is relatively higher than that in the addition state middle point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 37. In addition, in the additional state middle point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 37, a lottery value of “1” or more may be assigned to the point addition values 33 and 77 to which the lottery value “0” is assigned. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to notify of the type of the additional state by determining the predetermined point addition value.

[Configuration of various data used for reel effect control]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, configurations of various data used for reel effect control will be described.

<Reel effect selection data>
FIG. 38 shows an example of reel effect selection data stored in main ROM 52. Referring to FIG. The reel effect selection data is data used to control the effect by the symbol variation mode according to the determined reel action in the reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the data for selecting the reel effect is associated with the number of effects and the selection data for excitation output, or the effect phase end data, for each effect target reel.

  The number of effects is data defining the number of times of performing excitation output control based on the effect excitation output table or the symbol position adjustment data associated with the effect. For example, when "32" as the number of effects and "the excitation output table for reverse rotation" are associated as the excitation output table for presentation, the end code is entered from the start address of the "rotation output for reverse rotation" (see FIG. 39). It is defined that the excitation output control up to the point is performed once and 32 times are executed.

  The excitation output selection data is data for selecting the type of the effect excitation output table or the type of the symbol position adjustment data. Note that, in practice, the data selection output for the excitation output stores a data address indicating the location of the excitation output table for effect, or a data address indicating the location of the symbol position adjustment data. Although the output table or the symbol position adjustment data is read out, for convenience, in FIG. 38, each table or data is assumed to be stored directly.

  The effect phase end data is data for identifying the end of the reel effect (effect by the symbol variation mode) on the effect target reel. For example, when the reel effect selection data is “1” and the effect target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), the excitation main control by the hold excitation output table is executed ten times, the left reel 3L is selected. When the reel effect selection data is "2" and the effect target reel is "left" (left reel 3L) while the reel effect (effect by the symbol variation mode) ends, the excitation output table for acceleration rotation After the excitation output control by 1 is executed, the excitation output control by symbol position adjustment data 2 is further executed 84 times, and then the reel effect (effect by symbol fluctuation aspect) for the left reel 3L is controlled to be completed. Ru.

  As described above, by storing separately the number of effects and the selection data for excitation output and the effect phase end data for each of the effect target reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), various reel effects (effects by the symbol variation aspect) ) Is possible.

<Excitation output table for effect>
FIG. 39 is a view showing an example of the effect excitation output table stored in the main ROM 52. As shown in FIG. In the reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG. 59, this effect excitation output table is each based on excitation output selection data or a result of a reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61. It is used to output excitation data to the stepping motor.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the excitation output table for effect is associated with excitation direction data and an excitation timer for effect or an end code.

  The excitation direction data is data that defines the rotational direction of the reel (that is, the output order of pulses to the excitation phase in each stepping motor). For example, assuming that the excitation phase of the stepping motor is A to D (four phases), the excitation direction data “forward rotation” is in the order of A to B, B to C, C to D, D to A The excitation direction data is controlled so that the reel rotates forward (rotation from top to bottom in the player's viewpoint from the player's point of view) by outputting the excitation data, and the excitation direction data “reverse rotation” is the A-D phase , The D-C phase, the C-B phase, and the B-A phase, so that the reel is controlled to rotate in the reverse direction (from the player's point of view, from the bottom to the top). It is data, and the excitation direction data "hold" is controlled such that the reel remains stopped by exciting all the A to D phases or not exciting any of the A to D phases. It is data.

  The effect excitation timer defines the value of the timer which is decremented by one in the timer updating process (see S322 in FIG. 55) described later, and the end code is the excitation data of the excitation output table. It is data for identifying the end of output.

  That is, for example, when the “reverse rotation excitation output table” is set as the effect excitation output table, first, after outputting excitation data to reversely rotate the reel for the number of times of interruption twice, further, The excitation data for reversely rotating the reels is output by the number of times of interruption twice, and the control is ended.

<Effective design position search data>
FIG. 40 shows an example of effect symbol position search data stored in main ROM 52. Referring to FIG. The effect symbol position search data is a symbol position at the start or end of excitation output control in a reel effect (effect according to a symbol variation mode) in a reel effect adjustment output process described later in FIGS. 60 and 61. It is data used to search whether or not the effect pattern position is an appropriate symbol position.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the effect symbol position search data, the number of times of search and the effect symbol position search data are associated with each of the effect target reels according to the type of the reel action.

  The reel actions 1 to 8 are as described above, and the reel action 9 is a reel action to be executed when the effect gaming state is shifted to the “pseudo-determination state 1” in the “at-AT state”, and the reel action 10 Is a reel action that is executed when the effect gaming state shifts to the “pseudo-probability state 2” in the “at-AT state”. Further, the reel action 11 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "weak cherry", the reel action 12 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "strong cherry", and the reel action 13 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "watermelon" The reel action 14 corresponds to the simulated internal winning combination "chance role".

  In addition, the reel action 9 is a reel action in which the "red 7" symbol finally aligns in the middle on each reel, and in the reel action 10, the "red 7" symbol eventually aligns in the upper right on each reel The reel action 11 is a reel action in which a "cherry" symbol is displayed on the lower end of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and the upper end of the right reel 3R. Finally, each reel has a reel action in which a "cherry" pattern is aligned, and the reel action 13 is a reel action in which a "watermelon" pattern is aligned in the lower right of each reel. In the action 14, the "Replay" symbol is finally displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is displayed. "Cherry" symbols and has a reel action that is displayed in the middle.

  The number of times of search is data defining the number of times of searching for the effect symbol position in the reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61. In other words, in the effect target reel, it is appropriate as the effect symbol position. Data indicating the number of symbol positions. For example, when the reel action is "9" and the effect target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), one symbol position for displaying "red 7" symbol in the middle on the left reel 3L (symbol) Since the position data is only 2), the number of searches is "1" while the reel action is "12" and the effect target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), the left reel 3L Since there are two symbol positions (the symbol position data are 13 and 18) for displaying the "cherry" symbol in the lower part, the number of times of retrieval is "2".

  That is, when the symbol position adjustment data is in the middle of the data for reel effect selection, the effect symbol position search data is used as a symbol position when starting the excitation output control in the subsequent reel effect (effect by the symbol fluctuation mode) If the effect pattern position is used to search whether or not the symbol position is appropriate, and if the symbol position adjustment data is at the end of the reel effect selection data (more precisely, before the effect phase end data) Is used as a symbol position when ending the excitation output control in the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode), to search whether the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position.

[Flow of game of pachislot machine]
Next, the flow of the game of the pachislot machine 1 will be described using FIG. FIG. 41 is a schematic view showing a flow of gaming in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, assuming that the player plays a game, the AT game which is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player and the normal game relatively disadvantageous than the AT game It is divided roughly into the state and the normal game.

<Normal game>
The transition from normal gaming to AT gaming is that the number of games played after the AT game has reached the number of ceiling games mentioned above (the number of ceiling games has been settled), that the winning combination has been won (fixed winning combination), mentioned above It will be performed triggered by the fact that the reel actions 5 to 8 are determined in the main CZ state (CZ success).

  Here, when transitioning from the normal game to the AT game by the winning combination, the basic continuation number of AT gaming is first granted based on winning the winning combination (150 is added to the AT management difference sheet counter) ). Thereafter, as described above, the reel action (special reel actions 1 to 4) is determined according to the type of the determined combination, and the addition continuation number of AT games according to the determined reel action is awarded (difference management for AT management 300, 400 or 500 will be added to the counter.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning of the winning combination is not limited to merely generating the AT game, but determines the reel action to be executed in the next game based on the winning of the winning combination, and further, Since, when the determined reel action is a specific reel action (special reel actions 2 to 4), the number of AT game continuation times is increased based on the execution of this specific reel action, The sense of expectation can be improved not only in the game in which the winning combination is won or in the winning game, but also in the next game.

  In the present embodiment, the basic continuation number is given based on the winning of the fixed combination, and the addition continuation number is given according to the determined reel action. However, the basic continuation number and the addition continuation number About the aspect of provision of, it is not limited to this. For example, when the special reel action 1 is determined, the first continuation number is added as the basic continuation number (150 is added to the AT management difference sheet counter), and when the special reel action 2 is determined, the basic continuation number If the special reel action 3 is determined, the second continuation number is given as the second continuation number (AT management difference sheet counter is added 300), the third continuation number is given as the basic continuation number (AT management difference sheet counter If the special reel action 4 is determined, the fourth continuation number may be added as the basic continuation number (500 is added to the AT management difference sheet counter). In this case, if the basic continuation number provided by the notification means is notified when the special reel action is executed or at the end, not only in the game winning the winning combination or winning a prize, but also in the next game. Expectations can be improved. Further, in this case, the right to continue the AT game after the AT game is over may be granted as the addition continuation number (that is, the right to continue the AT game for one set). Furthermore, the number of rights to continue the AT game may be determined by lottery.

  Further, the execution of the reel action based on the winning combination of the fixed part may be performed not only during the normal game but also during the AT game. In this case, the basic continuation number described above is the basic addition number, and the above-described addition continuation number is the addition addition number, and may be provided to the player.

(Main CZ state)
Further, in the normal game, when "strong chance lip" is determined as an internal winning combination and "special ripple A1 to 6" or "special lip B" is won (strong chance ripple is established), the control of the main CPU 51 The effect game state shifts from the "normal game state" to the "main CZ state 1" and is in the main CZ state for eight games. Then, when the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” to shift thereafter, when a specific reel action (one of the reel actions 5 to 8) is determined and executed. CZ is successful, and it is supposed to shift from normal gaming to AT gaming.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 controls the chance zone state (main CZ state), which is a state easy to shift to AT gaming, and further, in the main CZ state, a plurality of reel actions ( Since a specific reel action (one of the reel actions 5 to 8) of the reel actions 1 to 8) is determined and made to shift to AT game when it is executed, the lock is only executed. Compared to the case, the expectation in the chance zone state can be significantly improved.

  The transition to the main CZ state may be performed not only during normal gaming but also during AT gaming. In this case, a specific reel action (one of the reel actions 5 to 8) is determined among the plurality of reel actions (reel actions 1 to 8), and the predetermined AT number is determined by the player based on the execution. It should be granted to Further, the number of ATs provided may be varied according to the type of a specific reel action (any of the reel actions 5 to 8).

<AT game>
When transitioning to AT game, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified until the value of the AT management difference sheet counter becomes 0 or less (the number of ATs is taken), and the stop is performed according to the notification. By performing the operation, the player can increase the medals.

  In addition, in the AT game, when any of “Berlip 1 to 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, when winning the addition lottery of the points in AT, the points in AT are accumulated and added. Then, when 4 points during the AT are added (the value of the during-AT point counter becomes 4), the AT game will be continued again even if the AT number is consumed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, there are provided two types of states, an added state and a pseudo-probability state, in which the number of ATs (the value of the difference sheet counter for AT management) can be added during AT game. .

(Overlay status)
In the AT game, when "BAR Lip 1" or "BAR Lip 2" is determined as an internal winning combination, and the first stop operation other than the left reel 3L is performed, if any of the winning replays is won, the sub CPU 81 It shifts to the added state by control of. This additional state continues for 12 games per set, and for the first additional game state (the value of the additional state management counter is 11) and the second game (the value of the additional state management counter is 10) The additional lottery is performed, and in the third to twelfth games (the value of the additional state management counter is 9 to 0), the lottery of points during the additional state is performed. Then, if the value of the point counter in the overtaking state becomes "100" or more, the number of games in the overcoming state is added according to whether the value of the point counter during overcharging state becomes "100" or more. While the number of ATs (the value of the difference sheet counter for AT management) is determined, the addition state can be performed again from the beginning (the setting is continued).

  In addition, in the additional state, even if winning in a small winning combination, the value of the AT management difference number counter is not decremented, and the procedure of the stopping operation that gives the most advantageous to the player is informed about the pushing order small winning combination. Therefore, if the additional state itself continues, the number of ATs will be increased, and the medals will also increase.

  In addition, in the superimposed state, a predetermined number which is the value of the point counter in the superimposed state for continuing the superimposed state is defined as "100", and the points in the superimposed state exceeding "100" which is the predetermined number are determined. If acquired, the surplus will be carried over to the next added state.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, a specific start condition is established during AT game (for example, "BAR Lip 1" or "BAR Lip 2" is determined as an internal winning combination, except for the left reel 3L. By performing the first stop operation, you win a prize in any of the replays, and the additional state is absorbed by 2 games), and a specific end condition is established (for example, the remaining 10 games are digested or added state) Is controlled to the above-mentioned additional state until And since this addition state also functions as a state in which the AT number is increased and also functions in a state in which the medal is increased, even if the AT number can not be increased, the player can receive the medal By ensuring that the benefits of the increase are enjoyed, it is possible to prevent the decline in the interest of the game. In addition, since the points during cumulative addition can be carried over during cumulative addition when successive addition is continued, waste is not generated in the lottery result of points during additional addition, and during the additional addition state. The expectation of the lottery can be further improved.

  Note that the transition to the additional state may be executed not only during AT game but also during normal game. In this case, on the basis of the value of the point counter in the additional state becoming “100” or more, it may be shifted to the AT game. In addition, the number of ATs initially provided may be varied in accordance with whether or not the value of the point counter during the addition state is “100” or more during the addition state.

(Pseudo probability state)
In addition, in AT game, when any of “Berlip 1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, and a transition lottery in a pseudo definite change state is won, a specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed, and the main CPU 51 Transition to the pseudo-deterministic state by control of. In this pseudo definite change state, the number of times of pseudo game when lock at the time of game start is executed once is determined, and the determined number of pseudo games can be performed. In addition, in the case of determination of the number of pseudo | simulation games, the number of pseudo | simulation games of multiple times can be determined.

  Here, the pseudo game is an operation (a pseudo insertion operation) to a bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1 BET button 15B) being locked at the game start, an operation (a pseudo start operation) to a start lever (a start lever 16), The progress is controlled by the determination of the simulated internal winning combination and the operation (pseudo-stop operation) to the stop button (stop button 17L, 17C, 17R), the game is controlled as if it is a normal game. It can impress the player as if it were in progress. In the present embodiment, the determination of the pseudo internal winning combination is performed based on the pseudo start operation, as with the determination of the internal winning combination in the normal game, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, the operation may be performed based on a pseudo input operation or a pseudo stop operation (in particular, a pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation). In addition, the pseudo insertion operation, the pseudo start operation, and the pseudo stop operation are collectively referred to as “pseudo game operation”. In addition, for convenience of explanation, the operation (normal insertion operation) to the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1 BET button 15B) in the normal game, the operation (normal start operation) to the start lever (start lever 16) in the normal game, normal The operations (normal stop operations) to the stop buttons (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) in the game are collectively referred to as "normal game operations".

  Then, in the pseudo definite variation state, the AT number (the value of the difference sheet counter for AT management) is additionally lottery based on the determined internal winning combination, and the AT number is determined based on the determined pseudo internal combination ( The value of the difference sheet number counter for AT management) is to be added.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the opportunity for the additional lottery of the AT number based on the internal winning combination but also the opportunity for the additional lottery of the AT number based on the pseudo internal winning combination during the pseudo definite variation state is provided. Therefore, it is possible to expect a plurality of additional lotterys in one unit game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game relating to the additional game. In addition, normally, in the pachislot machine, an upper limit is set to the payout number of medals awarded in one unit game (for example, 15), and further, the prescribed time required for one unit game However, for example, it is shorter than the specified time without conflicting with these provisions by using the pseudo game, although it is determined (for example, 4.1 seconds from the previous game start operation to the current game start operation) Since it is possible to generate a plurality of lotterys in time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the additional lottery condition which is advantageous to the player of the pseudo definite change condition.

  In addition, in the pseudo-determination state, the number of pseudo-games is determined relatively more than in the “pseudo-determination state 1” (first mode) and the “pseudo-determination state 1” (first mode) There is a probability change state 2 "(the second mode), and the" pseudo probability change state 1 "(the first mode) is selected based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (for example, having met the high probability transition lottery). It will shift to "pseudo-determination state 2" (second mode). In this "pseudo probability variation state 2" (the second mode), when the pseudo game is executed, the number of pseudo games played twice or more is always determined (see (a) in Fig. 30). It is possible to enjoy the opportunity of the additional lottery of the AT number based on the pseudo internal winning combination a plurality of times, and it is possible to diversify the additional lottery state which is advantageous to the player of the pseudo definite variation state.

  In addition, the transition from “pseudo probability change state 2” (the second mode) to “pseudo probability change state 1” (the first mode) is based on the number of times the pseudo game is actually performed (the number of high secured failure games). Therefore, it is possible to reliably enjoy the opportunity of the additional lottery of the AT number based on the pseudo game in the “pseudo probability variation state 2” (second mode).

  In the present embodiment, any one of "Bell lip 1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination, and a transition lottery in a pseudo positive change state is won, and a specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed. Then, although it is decided to shift to the pseudo-determination state, the transition trigger to the pseudo-determination state is not limited to this. For example, it is determined that the sub CPU 81 performs lottery to determine whether to shift to a pseudo-determination state, and when this lottery is won, a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, any one of normal lips 1 to 4) is performed under control of the sub CPU 81 At the time of winning, a predetermined stop operation order (for example, the stop operation order in which "BELLIP" is to be won ") is informed, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, the combination of symbols related to" BELLIP ") is displayed. The main CPU 51 may shift the effect gaming state to the “pseudo-probability state 1” based on the number of times having reached the predetermined number of times (for example, three times) to shift to the pseudo-probability state.

  Further, in this case, as the predetermined stop operation order, a first predetermined stop operation order (for example, “right and left middle” in “normal lip 1”, “middle left and right” in “normal lip 3”) The second sub-CPU 81 makes it possible to recognize the second predetermined stop operation order (for example, “right middle left” in “normal lip 1”, “middle right left” in “normal lip 3”), It is determined in advance which of the one predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order is to be notified, and the predetermined operation is performed based on the stop operation performed in the second predetermined stop operation order. If the number of times the symbol combination is displayed is equal to or more than the specific number (for example, twice), the main CPU 51 shifts the effect gaming state to the “pseudo probability state 2”, and if less than the specific number, the main CPU 51 Transitioning the effect game state to "pseudo probability state 1" It may be. Alternatively, while a predetermined symbol combination is displayed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined specific order (for example, the second predetermined stop operation order → the first predetermined stop operation order → the second predetermined stop) Based on whether or not the game in which the stop operation is performed is performed in the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order in the order of the operation order), the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 1 Alternatively, it may be distributed as to whether or not to be “pseudo-determination state 2”. Further, in these cases, the sub CPU 81 may determine whether to notify the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order by lottery of each unit game. Furthermore, if it is determined by lottery of each unit game whether to notify the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order, a specific internal winning combination (for example, watermelon) At the time of winning, the second predetermined stop operation order may be promoted to a state where the second predetermined stop operation order is easily notified.

  The transition to the pseudo-determination state may be performed not only during AT game but also during normal game. In this case, a transition lottery to AT game or main CZ state is performed based on the determined internal winning combination, and a transition lottery to AT game or main CZ state based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination Should be done.

[Main control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main control process>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main control processing. The main control process described below is started when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on.

  First, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 51 executes a power-on process shown in FIG. 43 (S10). In the power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal, whether the setting has been properly changed, and the like, and an initialization process according to the determination result is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes initialization processing at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display combination storing area of the main RAM 53 are cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes medal acceptance / start check processing shown in FIG. 44 (S12). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process of detecting a medal inserted by a player and a process of detecting a start operation are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 extracts random number values and stores them in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S13). Here, the random number is a value used for internal lottery processing (hereinafter, random number 1) and a value used for lock lottery processing (hereinafter, random number 2) in the present embodiment. , 0-65535.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes an internal lottery process shown in FIG. 45 (S14). The main CPU 51 that executes this internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determination means.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes lock lottery processing shown in FIG. 46 (S15). In this lock lottery process, lottery of whether or not to perform the “lock” described above, transition lottery of effect game state, and the like are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes reel stop initialization processing (S16). In the reel stop initial setting process, various stop control information of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R described above are stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 53 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S17). The start command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the type of internal winning combination, the type of gaming state flag, the type of effect gaming state, the type of lock and its period, and the bonus end number counter value. is there.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes wait processing (S18). In this weight processing, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous game start (the start of the last unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed The waiting time to wait until you are digested. The predetermined time in this weight processing, that is, the weight time, is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the last unit game.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49 (S19). In this lock execution process, based on the lottery result and the like in the lock lottery process in S15, the lock at the start of the game, the reel action during the lock execution, and the like are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel rotation start process of rotating all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S20). Along with the reel rotation start processing, “01110000” is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 26). The reel rotation start control is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 (more specifically, the reel control process shown in FIG. 58). This interrupt process is a process that is periodically executed every fixed period (1.1172 ms).

  The driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled by this interruption process, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started. Thereafter, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R is controlled by this interruption processing, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is accelerated until the rotation reaches a constant speed.

  Further, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled by this interruption processing so that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant speed. Maintained. When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed and the above-described reel index is detected, the stop operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is permitted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 S21). The reel rotation start command data is, for example, data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has been started.

  By receiving the reel rotation start command data, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize the reel rotation start, and can determine the timing and the like of executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes reel stop control processing (S22). Stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed by this reel stop control processing. Although not shown, in the reel stop control processing, the main CPU 51 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated reel stop command data is transmitted to the main RAM 53. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. The reel stop command data includes the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position (that is, the symbol position when the stop button is operated), and the number of sliding symbols or the planned stop position (that is, the reel actually stops). The symbol position or the like is data that can be recognized by the sub CPU 81.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a winning search process (S23). In this winning search process, after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is compared with the symbol combination table, and the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is identified. Ru.

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 23) and the data of the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 14) are collated, and as a result of the collation, if there is a match The data corresponding to the matched symbol combination (display combination) is stored in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 22), and the payout number (disbursed number counter value) associated with the symbol combination is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes medal payout processing for paying out the number of medals according to the obtained payout number counter value as a result of the winning search processing (S24). In this medal payout process, control of the hopper drive circuit 65 and update of the number of credits are performed based on the payout number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes state management processing shown in FIG. 51 (S25). In this state management process, transition control of the effect gaming state is executed based on the type of reel action executed and the type of winning combination, etc., and the output of an external signal from the above-mentioned external concentrated terminal board is turned on or off. Is managed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a game end lock execution process shown in FIG. 54 (S26). In the game termination lock execution process, lock or the like at the end of the game is executed based on predetermined execution conditions.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated winning operation command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S27) . The winning operation command data is, for example, data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize the type of display combination, the number-of-payouts counter value, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes bonus end check processing (S28). By the bonus end check process, a process of ending the operation of the BB is executed when the end condition of the BB is satisfied.

  More specifically, in the bonus end check process, it is determined whether or not the current payout sheet counter value is subtracted from the bonus end number counter value stored in the bonus operation check process described later. When it is determined that the value is a negative value, the BB end process is executed. In the BB end processing, the BB gaming state flag and the RB gaming state flag are turned off, and the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  Although not shown, in the bonus end check process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated bonus end command data is transmitted to the main RAM 53. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. The bonus end command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, that BB has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a bonus operation check process (S29). In the bonus operation check process, a process of performing BB operation or the like is executed based on the combination of the symbols displayed by the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. After executing the processing of step S29, the main CPU 51 returns to the processing of step S11.

  Specifically, in the bonus operation check process, first, it is determined whether the display combination is BB. Then, when it is determined that the display combination is BB, processing at BB operation is executed. In the BB activation process, the BB gaming state flag and the RB gaming state flag are turned on, and "75" is set as the value of the bonus end number counter. Also, the carryover combination storage area is cleared (the value of bit 0 is reset to “0”). Next, if it is determined that the display combination is not BB, it is determined whether the display combination is a replay. Then, when it is determined that the display combination is replay, an automatic insertion request is made. That is, control is performed such that the number of inserted pieces (three pieces) in the unit game this time is automatically inserted in the next unit game. If it is determined that the display combination is not a replay, the process ends.

  Although not shown, in the bonus operation check process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated bonus start command data is transmitted to the main RAM 53. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. The bonus start command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize that, for example, BB has started.

<Power-on process>
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing a power-on process executed in step S10 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the backup is normal (S30). In this judgment processing, it is judged whether the backup is normal or not by error detection using a checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 51 stores the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 and the check sum value calculated from the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 as backup data in the main RAM 53 at the time of power off, and the judgment processing at the time of power on (S30) , And reads the set value and the like stored in the main RAM 53 and the checksum value.

  Then, the main CPU 51 compares the checksum calculated from the read setting value and the like with the checksum that has been backed up, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison result matches.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the backed up setting values and the like in the main RAM 53 (S31). As a result, when the backup is normal, the setting value before the power-off is set in the main RAM 53.

  After executing the process of step S31, or when determining that the backup is not normal in step S30 (NO), the main CPU 51 is a setting change switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1 It is determined whether or not the) is on (S32). Here, when determining that the setting change switch is on (YES), the main CPU 51 executes initialization processing at the time of setting change (S33).

  In the initialization process at the time of the setting change, for example, data stored in the internal winning combination storing area, the symbol code storing area, and the display combination storing area of the main RAM 53 are cleared, and the setting value is cleared. Note that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area may or may not be cleared.

  Further, in the initialization process at the time of the setting change, the data stored in the effect game state storage area is cleared, and the high securing failure game number counter and the CZ game number counter are cleared. Then, the "normal game state" is set as the effect game state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S34) . The initialization command data is, for example, data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize the presence or absence of a setting value change and the setting value.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes setting value change processing (S35). In this setting value changing process, the setting value is selected from among 1 to 6 in accordance with the operation result of the reset switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1, and subsequently, The set value selected when the start lever 16 is operated is decided.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the setting change switch is in the on state (S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until the determination result is not in the on state.

  Here, when the determination result that the setting change switch is not in the on state is obtained (that is, when the setting change switch is turned off from on) (NO), the main control circuit 41 performs sub-control The initialization command data to be transmitted to the circuit 42 is generated, and the generated initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S37), and the power-on process is ended.

  In step S32, when the main CPU 51 determines that the setting change switch is not turned on (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the backup is normal (S38). Here, if it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 51 executes power-on error processing (S39).

  In the power-on error process, the main CPU 51 displays that the backup is not normal by an error display or the like. In the state of an error (backup error) where the backup is not normal, the main CPU 51 does not release the error state by the operation of the stop release switch (not shown) or the reset switch (not shown). The error state is canceled only when the setting is newly changed.

  If it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 51 restores the state of the pachislot machine 1 to the state before the power failure based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 53. (S40), the power-on process ends.

<Medal acceptance and start check processing>
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether there is an automatic input request (S50). That is, it is determined whether or not the player has won the replay in the previous unit game.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 51 executes automatic insertion processing for automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (S51). Specifically, the main CPU 51 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53. A transmission process is performed (S52). Here, the medal insertion command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the presence or absence of medal insertion, the value of the inserted number counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), the main CPU 51 permits reception of medals (S53). For example, the main CPU 51 drives a solenoid (not shown) of the selector 35 to form a route so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 can pass through the selector 35.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the reception of medals is prohibited from the previous unit game, so processing related to the reception of medals Although it is assumed that the player does not execute the game, medal acceptance may be permitted even when the player has won a replay in the previous unit game.

  After the process of step S52 or S53 is executed, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets in the main RAM 53 in accordance with the gaming state (S54). In the present embodiment, 3 is set as the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets in any gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (S55). Here, if it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the medals have been inserted properly or whether the MAX bet button 15A or the 1 BET button 15B has been operated. To check the medal insertion check process (S56). In this medal insertion check process, when medals are inserted properly, or when medals are inserted by operation from a credit to the MAX bet button 15A or 1 BET button 15B, depending on the number of inserted medals, The value of the insertion number counter or the value of the credit counter is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53. The transmission process is executed (S57).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether medals can be inserted or credited (S58). In the present embodiment, on the condition that main CPU 51 sets the value of the number-of-sheets counter to 3 and the value of the credit counter is 50 or that the automatic insertion process of step S51 has been executed. If the condition is satisfied, it is determined that medal insertion or credit is not possible, and if the condition is not satisfied, it is determined that medal insertion or credit is possible.

  When it is determined in step S58 that the insertion of medals or the credit is not possible (NO), the main CPU 51 prohibits the reception of medals (S59). For example, the main CPU 51 forms a route so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 is discharged from the medal payout opening 24 without driving the solenoid of the selector 35.

  If it is determined in step S55 that acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), if it is determined in step S58 that medal insertion or credit is possible (YES), or after the process of step S59 is executed. The main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the game. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is 3 which is the maximum value (S60).

  Here, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the start switch 16S is on (S61).

  Here, if it is determined that the start switch 16S is not on (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start switch 6S is on (YES), the main CPU 51 prohibits medal acceptance (S62), and ends the medal acceptance / start check process.

<Internal lottery process>
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state in the main RAM 53 (S70). In the present embodiment, main CPU 51 sets one of the internal lottery tables shown in FIG. 15 or 16 in main RAM 53 in accordance with the gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires random number values stored in the random number value storage area (S71). The random number value acquired here is a random number value 1. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S70, acquires one lottery value associated with each winning number of the corresponding setting value, and extracts the lottery value from the random number value Is subtracted (S72). That is, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not the internal winning combination associated with the winning number is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the subtraction result by the process of step S72 is less than 0 (S73). Here, when the main CPU 51 determines that the subtraction result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S74).

  Next, main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers in the internal lottery table being used have been checked (S75), and if it is determined that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO) , And return to the process of step S72.

  On the other hand, when determining that all the winning numbers have been checked (YES), the main CPU 51 sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S76). In the present embodiment, the internal gaming table for the normal gaming state is set such that the subtraction result does not necessarily become 0 or more when the main CPU 51 finishes checking all the winning numbers, so the BB gaming state Step S76 is not performed except in the case of (RB gaming state).

  In step S73, when the main CPU 51 determines that the subtraction result is less than 0 (YES), the internal lottery table set in the main RAM 53 is referred to, and from the winning number to the data pointer for the small part and replay data pointer. The value and the value of the bonus data pointer are acquired (S77).

  After executing the process of step S76 or S77, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay (refer to FIG. 17), and based on the value of the data pointer for small winning combination / replay, the internal winning combination Is acquired (S78).

  In the process of step S78, the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay is referred to, and 27 bytes indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer acquired in the processing of step S76 or S77. Data values are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the internal winning combination obtained in step S78 in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 21) (S79). In the process of step S79, a 27-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S78 is stored in the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 27.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S80). If the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), it refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18), and internally based on the value of the bonus data pointer. Obtain a winning combination (S81).

  In the process of step S81, a bonus internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and a 27-byte data value indicating an internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the process of step S76 or S77 is determined. Ru.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the internal winning combination obtained in step S81 in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) (S82). In the process of step S82, when "BB" is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S81, bit 0 corresponding to "BB" of the carryover storage area is set to "1".

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S83). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not bit 0 corresponding to "BB" in the carryover combination storage area is set to "1" in step S82.

  When it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination is "BB" (S84). Here, when the main CPU 31 determines that the internal winning combination is "BB" (YES), it sets the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (S85). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets “1” to the RT1 gaming state flag. In the present embodiment, since the bonus combination is only "BB", the determination process may not be performed.

  If it is determined in step S80 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), if it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), the internal winning combination is "BB" in step S84. (NO) or after executing the processing of step S85, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S86) .

<Lock lottery processing>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the lock lottery process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (S90). Specifically, it is determined whether "1" is set in the RT1 gaming state flag. When the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is not the RT1 gaming state (NO), the lock lottery processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when determining that the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the effect gaming state is the “at-AT state” (S91). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the “at-AT state” (NO), the main-game random determination process (S102) described later in FIG. 48 is executed, and the lock lottery process is ended.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S91 that the effect gaming state is the "at-AT state" (YES), subsequently, whether or not the effect gaming state is the pseudo positive change state, that is, the effect gaming state is It is judged whether it is in the state 1 "or" pseudo-probability state 2 "(S92). If it is determined that the effect gaming state is “pseudo-probability state 1” or “pseudo-probability state 2” (YES), lottery processing (S93) is performed during pseudo-probability state described later in the explanation of FIG. End the lock lottery process.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S 92 that the effect game state is not “pseudo probability state 1” or “pseudo probability state 2” (NO), then the internal winning combination is any of bell lip 1 to 4 It is determined whether or not it is (S94). When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is any of the bellrips 1 to 4 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes pseudo-probability state transition lottery based on the random value 2 (S95).

  In this pseudo-determination state transition lottery, for example, the transition to the pseudo-probability state is won with a probability of 512/65536, and the lottery is performed so as not to win the transition to the pseudo-probability state with a probability of 65024/65536. .

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the pseudo positive change state shift lottery is a winning (S96). If it is determined that the result of the pseudo-probable-state transition lottery is not winning (is not winning) (NO), the lock lottery processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the result of the pseudo positive change state shift lottery is a win (YES), the main CPU 51 randomly determines the reel action 9 or 10 based on the random value 3 (S97). In the process of step S97, for example, the reel action 9 is determined with a probability of 192/256, and the reel action 10 is determined with a probability of 64/256.

  Here, the random number value 3 is different from the random number value 1 and the random number value 2 and is a random number value which is separately generated and acquired each time a necessity arises in various processes in the main control process. Similar to random number 1 and random number 2, random number 3 may be obtained by obtaining the random number generated in random number generator 56 described above and stored in the random value storage area, or A latch circuit (not shown) may be used to obtain a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, when various switches such as the start switch 16S are turned on or off).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “pseudo-probability state 1” or “pseudo-probability state 2” as the effect game state according to the type of the reel action (S98). For example, if the determined reel action is the reel action 9, “pseudo probability change state 1” is set as the effect gaming state, and if the determined reel action is the reel action 10, “the pseudo probability state” is the effect gaming state Set 2 ".

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the high securing failure game number 5 to the high securing failure game number counter if the “pseudo probability variation state 2” is set as the effect gaming state (S99), and the lock lottery processing is ended. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not any of the bell lip 1 to 4 in step S94 (NO), subsequently, the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination is the strong chance lip or not. (S100). When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), the main CPU 51 executes lottery for pushing order of the additional lock based on the random number 2, and stores the lottery result (S101). End the lock lottery process. Also, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO), the lock lottery processing is ended.

<Lottery processing during pseudo definite change state>
FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing a lottery process during pseudo-probability state executed in step S93 of the lock lottery process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the "pseudo probability change state 2" (S200). If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is the “pseudo probability variation state 2” (YES), the process proceeds to step S206.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the “pseudo probability variation state 2” (NO), it refers to the high probability transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. The transition state is determined (S201).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the high probability transition has been made, that is, whether or not the high probability transition has been determined as the transition state (S202). If the main CPU 51 determines that the high probability transition has not been determined as the transition state (the maintenance of the current state has been determined) (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S206.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the high probability transition has been determined as the transition state (YES), the high securement failure game number lottery table shown in (d) of FIG. The number of high securing obstacle games is determined (S203).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the high secured failure game number determined in step S203 in the high secured failure game number counter (S204), and sets the “pseudo-probability state 2” as the effect gaming state (S205) .

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo game frequency lottery table shown in (a) of FIG. 30, and determines whether the random number 3 and the type of pseudo positive change state, that is, the effect game state is “false positive change state 1” The number of pseudo games is determined based on whether the state is "pseudo probability change state 2" (S206), and the number of pseudo games determined in step S206 is set in the counter for the number of pseudo games (S207).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S208). If the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table shown in (b) of FIG. 30 is referred to, and the pseudo internal winning combination is made based on the random number 3. Are determined (S209), and the lottery processing is ended during the pseudo-determination state. Further, when the main CPU 51 determines that the counter for the number of times of pseudo game is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery process during the pseudo probability variation state.

<Normal game lottery processing>
FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a lottery processing during a normal game executed in step S102 of the lock lottery processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination is a fixed combination (S220). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination is a cherry lip, a strong cherry lip, or a strong bell. If the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is the determined combination (YES), it is executed in the next game based on the random number 3 with reference to the reel combination lottery table for determined combination shown in FIG. 31. The type of the special reel action (any one of the special reel actions 1 to 4) is determined (S221), and the lottery process in the normal game is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not the final combination (NO), subsequently, whether or not the main CZ state is in effect, that is, the effect gaming state is "main CZ state 1", or " It is determined whether or not the main CZ state 2 "(S222). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the “main CZ state 1” or the “main CZ state 2” (NO), the normal game in-game lottery process is ended.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S222 that the effect game state is "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 2" (YES), subsequently, the reel action 7 or 8 is set. It is determined whether or not there is (S223). If the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action 7 or 8 is set (YES), it ends the lottery processing during the normal game.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action 7 or 8 is not set in step S223 (NO), the main CZ state reel action lottery table shown in FIG. Based on whether the effect game state is "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 2", the CZ game number counter value (what game number of the main CZ state), and random number value 2 And one of the reel actions 1 to 8 (S224).

  Next, the main CPU 51 increments the CZ game number counter by 1 (S225), and ends the lottery processing during the normal game.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the effect game state is "normal game state" and the internal winning combination is a push order small part (small part · replay data pointer is , “17” to “40”), when the stop button 17L is not operated in the first stop operation, the lottery process is performed during the normal game during the predetermined game (for example, 10 games). It may be configured not to be (that is, to give a "penalty"). This makes it possible to prevent the player of the pachislot machine developer and the game arcade from being given an unintended benefit to the player.

<Lock processing at game start>
FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing a game start lock execution process executed in step S19 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether a special reel action has been determined (S110). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined in the above-described lottery process for the normal game in the previous game. If it is determined that the special reel action has been determined (YES), an effect timer corresponding to the type of the special reel action is set (S111), and the process proceeds to step S114. In the process of step S111, for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined, “3581” (about 4 seconds) is set as the effect timer, and when the special reel action 4 is determined, By setting “13427” (about 15 seconds) as the effect timer, control is performed so that locking is performed while the special reel action is performed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special reel action is not determined (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the reel action is determined (S112). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the reel actions 1 to 8 has been determined in the previous game or the above-described lottery process for the normal game in the current game. If it is determined that the reel action is determined (YES), a rendering timer according to the type of the reel action is set (S113). In the process of step S113, for example, when the reel action 1 is determined, “1791” (about 2 seconds) is set as the effect timer, and when the reel action 6 or 8 is determined, Set “8951” (about 10 seconds) as an effect timer.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S114). Start lock processing ends. Here, the lock command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize the value of the effect timer, the type of special reel action, the type of reel action, the type of pseudo internal winning combination, and the like.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action has not been determined in step S112 (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the pseudo game frequency counter is 0 (S115). When the main CPU 51 determines that the counter for the number of times of pseudo game play is 0 (YES), the game start lock execution process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo game frequency counter is not 0 (NO), a timer for effect game time is set (S116). Here, the value for the effect timer (for example, “26853” (about 30 seconds)) predetermined to be required for each pseudo game is set in the pseudo game time effect timer.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether a pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (S117). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pseudo internal winning combination has already been determined in S209 in the lottery process during the pseudo definite variation state described above. When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (YES), the main CPU 51 shifts the processing to step S119. If the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), it refers to the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table shown in (b) of FIG. A pseudo internal winning combination is determined (S118).

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates the above-mentioned lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S119) The pseudo game process (S120) to be described later in the description of FIG. 50 is executed, and the pseudo game number counter is decremented by 1 (S121).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S122). When the main CPU 51 determines that the counter for the number of times of pseudo game play is not 0 (NO), the process returns to the process of step S116.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES), it executes random delay processing (S123), and ends the game start lock execution processing.

(Random delay processing)
In pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the dummy game process described later in FIG. 50 is completed, reels 3L and 3C are processed by the reel rotation start process executed in step S20 of the main control process shown in FIG. , 3R's original rotation is to be started, for example, when the execution of the lock at the start of the game is finished after the “watermelon” symbol alignment is pseudo-stopped, the reel 3L is started from the state where the “watermelon” symbols are aligned. The original rotation of 3C and 3R will be started, and there is a possibility that it will be adjusted that harms the fairness of the game. This is because it is possible that the player can easily grasp the timing of the stop operation by performing the effect by the reel (for example, a pseudo game), and the effect by the reel is intended if no action is taken. It is because it will have the auxiliary function of the eye pushing without doing.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined symbol is displayed at the end of execution of the lock at the start of the game (in the above example, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned) In this case, a predetermined random number (for example, random number 3) is acquired for each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and a timer is set based on the acquired random number, and the number of times of interruption of the set timer The start of rotation of the reel is randomly delayed.

  By configuring in this way, there is no risk that the adjustment will be made against the fairness of the game, even when performing effects by reels (for example, pseudo game), and the game is started (the original rotation of the reels is started ) Can be.

<Pseudo game processing>
FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing a pseudo game process executed in step S120 of the game start lock execution process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 executes detection of a reel index for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R by the above-described reel position detection circuit 63 (S129). That is, the main CPU 51 starts rotation (hereinafter, pseudo rotation) of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the purpose of playing a pseudo game by the reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG. The symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in rotation is made detectable.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop operation (pseudo stop operation) has been performed on the reel capable of pseudo stop (S130). That is, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R in pseudo rotation are operated.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation has been performed on the pseudo-stoppable reel (YES), the main CPU 51 stops the reel at the pseudo-stop position according to the determined pseudo internal winning combination (S131). For example, when a watermelon is determined as a simulated internal winning combination, when a pseudo stop operation is made by the player, a symbol of "watermelon" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. To stop

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets pseudo stop state holding data according to the type of the reel that has been pseudo stopped (S132). Thus, for example, in the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, control is performed so that rotation in the reverse rotation direction and rotation in the forward rotation direction are alternately performed at different timings. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the pseudo stop appear to vibrate as if in the vertical direction, so the stop by each reel by the pseudo stop control and the normal stop control It is possible to prevent confusion with the stop of each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether there is a reel that can be pseudo-stopped (S133). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is still pseudo-rotating. If it is determined that there is a reel that can be pseudo-stopped (YES), the processing returns to step S130. If it is determined that there is no reel that can be pseudo-stopped (NO), the processing proceeds to step S136.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S130 that the stop operation is not performed on the reel capable of pseudo stop (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the effect timer is 0 (S134). . If it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the process returns to step S130, and if it is determined that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the determined pseudo internal winning combination is made. The reel action according to is set (S135), and the process proceeds to step S138.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of playing a pseudo game, when the player does not operate the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, the game is performed according to the determined pseudo internal winning combination. Since the reel action is set and the reel is automatically stopped at the pseudo stop position corresponding to the determined pseudo internal winning combination, the player who did not perform the pseudo stop operation is also configured. The reel effect by the pseudo game can be surely enjoyed.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S133 that there is no reel that can be pseudo-stopped (NO), the main CPU 51 then determines whether the bet button has been operated (S136). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the MAX bet button 15A or 1 BET button 15B has been operated. When the main CPU 51 determines that the bet button has been operated (YES), the process proceeds to step S138.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bet button has not been operated (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the effect timer is 0 (S137). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the process returns to the process of step S136.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S137 that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 then determines whether or not the start lever operation (simulation start operation) has been performed (S138). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated. If it is determined that the start lever has not been operated (NO), the process of step S138 is repeatedly performed. As a result, even when one pseudo game is automatically advanced, the next pseudo game is started based on the pseudo start operation of the player, so that the pseudo game is started. In addition to being able to reliably receive the reel effect, it is also possible to reliably receive the benefit of the decision of the addition based on the simulated internal winning combination.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the start lever has been operated in step S138 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the effect timer is 0 (S139). If it is determined that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the pseudo game processing is ended. If it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the effect timer is updated to 0 (S140), and the pseudo game process is ended.

  Note that the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 even if it is determined that the start lever is not operated in step S138 (NO), and the effect timer is 0 If it is determined, the pseudo game process may be ended. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the pseudo game from interfering with the smooth progression of the normal game.

  Further, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation has been performed on the pseudo-stoppable reel in step S130 (YES), and determines that the bet button has been operated in step S136 (YES), in step S138. When it is determined that there is an operation of the start lever (YES), in any case or in all cases, a predetermined value is added to the effect timer or the initial value is reset to the effect timer You may do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player performing each operation described above in the pseudo game to surely enjoy the reel effect by the pseudo game by preventing the effect timer from becoming 0. It is possible to prevent the reel effect by the pseudo game from becoming redundant more than necessary.

<State management process>
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the state management process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the "at-AT state" (S150). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the "at-AT state" (YES), the at-AT state management process (S151) described later in the explanation of Fig. 52 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S160. .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the "AT in progress" (NO), subsequently, whether or not the main CZ state is in effect, that is, the effect gaming state is "main CZ state 1" Or, it is determined whether or not the "main CZ state 2" (S152). If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the “main CZ state 1” or the “main CZ state 2” (YES), the process proceeds to step S155.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the “main CZ state 1” or the “main CZ state 2” in step S152 (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently wins a strong chance return in the left first stop. As the internal winning combination, "strong chance rep" (small part and replay data pointer value is "11" is determined, and the left reel 3L is subjected to the first stop operation, so that "special It is determined whether or not any of A1 to 6 "or" special lip B "is won (S153). If it is determined that the strong chance lip is won in the left first stop (YES), "main CZ state 1" is set as the effect game state (S154), and the process proceeds to step S160. In addition, when it is determined that the strong chance lip has not been won by the left first stop (NO), the processing proceeds to step S160.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” in step S 152 (YES), subsequently, whether the reel action 3 or 4 is executed It is determined whether or not it is (S155). If it is determined that the reel action 3 or 4 has been executed (YES), the "main CZ state 2" is set as the effect game state (S156), and the state management process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action 3 or 4 is not performed (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is performed (S157). If the main CPU 51 determines that any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 has been executed (YES), the effect game state set, the "main CZ state 1", or the "main CZ state 2" is cleared. (S159), the state management process ends.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is not executed in step S157 (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the CZ game number counter is 8 or not (S158). ). When the main CPU 51 determines that the CZ game number counter is 8 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the process of S159 described above, and ends the state management process. Also, when the main CPU 51 determines that the CZ game number counter is not 8 (NO), the state management process is ended.

<AT mid-state management process>
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the during-AT state management process executed in step S151 of the state management process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change state 2” (S230). If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is the “pseudo probability variation state 2” (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the pseudo game has been executed (S231). Specifically, one or more times is determined as the number of times of pseudo game in step S206 of the lottery process during pseudo definite state shown in FIG. 47, and the pseudo game is performed in step S120 of lock execution processing at game start shown in FIG. It is determined whether the process has been executed. When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game is not being executed (NO), the main CPU 51 shifts the processing to step S236.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S231 that the pseudo game has been executed (YES), the main CPU 51 subtracts one from the high secured failure game number counter (S232). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the high secured failure game number counter is 0 or not (S233). If the main CPU 51 determines that the high secured failure game number counter is 0 (YES), it sets “pseudo probability change state 1” as the effect game state (S234), and proceeds to the process of step S236. That is, the main CPU 51 ends the effect game state “pseudo probability state 2” based on the high secured failure game number counter becoming zero. Also, when the main CPU 51 determines that the high secured failure game number counter is not 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 shifts the processing to step S236.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not "the pseudo probability change state 2" in step S230 (NO), subsequently, whether or not the effect game state is the "pseudo probability change state 1" It judges (S235). If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the “pseudo-probability state 1” (NO), the process proceeds to step S238.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is the “pseudo probability change state 1” in step S235 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not a bell lip is won (S236). If it is determined that the bell lip has not been won (NO), the process proceeds to step S238. If it is determined that the bell lip has been won (YES), the pseudo probability change state is cleared (S237). That is, Bellrip's winning is an end condition of the effect game state "pseudo probability variation state 1" and "pseudo probability variation state 2".

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not any bell has been won (S238). Specifically, one of the "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", which are "push order small part", is determined as the internal winning combination as the internal winning combination. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols (see FIG. 14) relating to any one of the small winning combinations for which seven medals will be paid out is won. When the main CPU 51 determines that one of the bells has been won (YES), the AT game in-game number-of-times counter is incremented by 1 (S239), and the in-AT state management process is ended. Further, when the main CPU 51 determines that one of the bells has not been won (NO), the AT state management process is ended.

  In step S238, the main CPU 51 may determine whether or not one of the bells has been won, instead of whether or not one of the bells has been won. Specifically, one of the "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", which are "push order small part", is determined as the internal winning combination as the internal winning combination. If it is determined whether or not one of the bells has been won, the process of step S239 may be executed. That is, the AT game in-game prize number counter may be a counter updated at the winning of the “push order small part”. By configuring in this way, for example, in the AT game, between the player who has performed the stop operation ignoring the notified stop operation order and the player who performed the stop operation according to the notified stop operation order, Since there is a difference in the profit obtained, it is possible to enhance the sense of tension in the AT game and to improve the interest of the game.

<External signal output management process>
FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the external signal output management process executed in step S160 of the state management process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the external signal 1 functions as a signal for displaying on the external display etc. the number of continuations of AT gaming, that is, how long AT gaming continues, and the external signal 2 It functions as a signal for displaying on the external display etc. the number of times of AT game first hit, that is, the transition from the normal game to the AT game.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether only the external signal 2 is on, that is, only the external signal 2 is output (S250). If it is determined that only the external signal 2 is on (YES), the external signal 1 is set on, that is, the output of the external signal 1 is started (S251), the AT game in-game prize counter, the AT end check counter The initial value (for example, 0) is set to (S 252), and the external signal output management process is ended.

  On the other hand, when main CPU 51 determines that only external signal 2 is not on (NO), subsequently, both external signals 1 and 2 are on, that is, whether external signal 1 and external signal 2 are both output. It is judged whether or not (S253).

  If the main CPU 51 determines that both the external signals 1 and 2 are on (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the AT game in-use number-of-times counter has a predetermined value (S254). Here, for example, “38” is defined as the predetermined value. When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT game winning number counter is a predetermined value (YES), the external signal 1 is turned off, that is, the output of the external signal 1 is ended (S255), and the external signal output management process Finish.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the AT game internal winning number counter is not the predetermined value in step S 254 (NO), it determines whether or not the first or middle first stop has occurred at the time of pushing order bell winning ( S256). Specifically, one of the "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", which are "push order small part", is determined as the internal winning combination as the internal winning combination. In this case, it is determined whether the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R has been subjected to the first stop operation.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the middle / right first stop is made at the push order bell winning in step S256 (YES), the main CPU 51 then determines whether the AT end check counter is 1 or more (S257) ). When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (NO), the external signal output management process is ended. If the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 0) to the AT end check counter (S258), and performs external signal output management processing. finish.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the middle / right first stop is not made at the push order bell winning in step S256 (NO), then the main CPU 51 determines whether the left first stop is made at the push order bell win. (S259). Specifically, one of the "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", which are "push order small part", is determined as the internal winning combination as the internal winning combination. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the left reel 3L has been subjected to the first stop operation. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is not made at the push order bell winning (NO), the external signal output management process ends.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is made at the push order bell winning in step S259 (YES), the AT end check counter is incremented by 1 (S260), and then the AT end check counter is 2 It is determined whether there is any (S261). When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is not 2 (NO), the external signal output management process is ended.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is 2 in step S261 (YES), the external signals 1 and 2 are turned off, that is, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 is ended (S262) ), The effect game state set, and the "AT in progress state" are cleared (S263), and the external signal output management process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the external signals 1 and 2 are not both on in step S253 (NO), subsequently, whether or not any bell is won in the middle / right first stop is determined It judges (S264). Specifically, one of the "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", which are "push order small part", is determined as the internal winning combination as the internal winning combination. If the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is subjected to the first stop operation and seven medals are to be paid out, whether the combination of symbols pertaining to any of the small winning combinations (see FIG. 14) has won or not To judge. When the main CPU 51 determines that one of the bells in the middle / right first stop is won (YES), the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the number-of-time-of-game in-game counter (S265).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the normal game in-use number-of-times counter is 3 (S266). If the main CPU 51 determines that the normal game in-game prize number counter is not 3 (NO), the external signal output management process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the normal game in-game number-of-times counter is 3 (YES), the external signal 2 is turned on, that is, the output of the external signal 2 is started (S267). The "in AT state" is set (S268), and the external signal output management process is ended.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S 264 that one of the bells in the middle / right first stop has not won a prize (NO), subsequently, whether or not the first stop on the left at the push order bell wins or not (S269). Specifically, one of the "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", which are "push order small part", is determined as the internal winning combination as the internal winning combination. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the left reel 3L has been subjected to the first stop operation. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is not made at the push order bell winning (NO), the external signal output management process ends. Further, when the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is made at the push order bell winning (YES), an initial value (for example, 0) is set to the normal game in-use number-of-times counter (S270) and the external signal output End the management process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the start condition for shifting to AT game is satisfied, and after shifting from the normal game to the AT game, the value of the normal game in-game number-of-times counter becomes 3 (that is, The order game state is shifted to the "at AT state" based on the fact that the player wins the winning order with 3 consecutive wins, and the output of the external signal 2 is started, and the external signal is transmitted next time in the game Based on the fact that only 2 is output, the output of the external signal 1 is started, and when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the AT game winning number counter becomes 38. It is configured to end only the output of the external signal 1 on the basis of (that is, in the "AT in progress", the number of winnings of "push order small part" becomes 38 times). Here, when the AT game continues, the output of the external signal 1 is started again in the next game. In addition, when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the AT end check counter becomes 2 (that is, the order of incorrect order is incorrect for 2 consecutive operations at the time of winning "small order of push"). , And the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 is terminated.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the state of AT game, which is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, is output from at least two types of external signals from the external concentrated terminal board of pachi-slot machine 1 to obtain an external indicator etc. Since the notification can be made by the user, it is possible to appropriately display the number of AT games first hit and the number of AT game continuations, which are of high interest to the player, using an external indicator or the like. Moreover, since the output timing of the external signal 1 can be made different from the output timing of the external signal 2 with a simple configuration, the control burden on the external display side can be reduced and occurrence of a communication error or the like. Can also be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the condition for starting the output of the external signal 2 is that the value of the normal game number-of-games counter is 3 (that is, the pressing order correct answer is 3 consecutive when "push order small winning combination" is won). It is configured that its establishment comes later than the start condition (start of AT game under control of sub CPU 81) to shift to AT game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the condition for ending the output of the external signal 1 is that the value of the AT game winning number counter becomes 38 (that is, in the "AT in state", "push order small part") It is assumed that the number of winnings has reached 38 times and that its establishment comes later than the termination condition (termination of AT gaming under control of the sub CPU 81) at which AT gaming is terminated. Specifically, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 73, when “150” is set as the initial value of the AT management difference sheet counter, the addition of the AT game in-use prize number counter is started, Since the player has won the "push order small part" three times, the value of the AT management difference sheet counter at that time is "150-4 × 3 times = 138". Thereafter, in the "at-AT state", when the number of winnings of "push order small part" is 35 times, the value of the AT management difference sheet counter is "138-4 × 35 times = -2". The condition for ending the output of the external signal 1 comes later than the ending condition for ending the AT game.

  Then, when the AT game ends, when the value of the AT end check counter becomes 2, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 ends, and when the AT game continues, the value of the AT end check counter The value of the AT game winning number counter becomes 38 before the number becomes 2, and once the output of the external signal 1 is ended, the output of the external signal 1 is started again to indicate the number of continuations of the AT. Information can be displayed on an external display. The initial value “150” of the AT management difference sheet counter can be replaced with the AT number “38 times”. Therefore, if the AT number “38 times” is regarded as one set, the output of the external signal 1 is It can also be said that it becomes possible to display information representing how many sets of one AT game have been played on the external display.

  With this configuration, the player can be notified of the start and end of the AT game, for example, by notifying the liquid crystal display 11 or the like earlier than the display by the external display etc. The convenience of the player who is playing can be improved. Also, since the subtraction value of the AT management difference sheet counter due to the winning by the "push order small winning combination" and the number of wins show almost the same value, in particular, the number of continuations (1 set) of AT gaming, It can be displayed properly with a simple configuration.

<At the end of the game lock execution process>
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing a game end lock execution process executed in step S26 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (S170). When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO), the game end lock execution process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the stop operation is performed in the pushing order for the additional lock (S171). Here, the pushing order for the overlay lock is the stop operation order stored in S101 of the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 46, and more specifically, the left first stop (ie, the stop operation order “left middle right Or the four stop operation orders (ie, the stop operation order “middle left and right”, “middle right left”, “right left middle” or “right middle left”) except for “right and left middle” are determined by lottery. One stop operation sequence. When the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation is not performed in the pushing order for the additional lock (NO), the game end lock execution process is ended.

  If the main CPU determines in step S171 that the stop operation has been performed in the push-on order for superimposition lock (YES), the lock data is set after all stop (S173), and “3581” (approximately 4 seconds) for the effect timer Is set (S174), the above-mentioned lock command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 is generated, and the generated lock command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S175). ), The game end lock execution processing ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, when the stop operation is performed at the first stop on the left and the winning is achieved, the effect game state If is the "normal gaming state", the effect gaming state will shift to the "main CZ state 1", but no benefit will be provided if the effect gaming state is the "at-AT state".

  Also, in the present embodiment, after AT game is started by the control of sub CPU 81, the effect game state is shifted to "at AT state" by the control of main CPU 51, so there is AT game in progress. If the effect game state is not "at AT state" (this state may be referred to as "at AT preparation state") will also occur, but in this case, the effect game state is "main CZ state 1" It is not appropriate to shift to

  On the other hand, although the winning probability of the strong chance lip does not change depending on each effect gaming state, or whether it is a normal game or AT game (see FIG. 15), it is totally profitable by the winning chance of the strong chance lip. It is also unreasonable that the

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, the pushing order of the additional lock is determined by lottery, and the stopping operation is performed in the determined pushing order of the additional lock. In this case, a benefit different from the benefit of shifting the effect game state to the "main CZ state 1" is provided.

  Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, during the normal game, under the control of the sub CPU 81, the notification of the stop operation order for causing the player to make the left first stop is executed or Alternatively, when giving a penalty as described above, the player is made to perform the stop operation by the left first stop by intentionally not notifying the stop operation order, and the effect gaming state is "main CZ state 1 To provide the benefit of transitioning to

  On the other hand, in the AT game or in the AT preparation state, under control of the sub CPU 81, first, lottery of whether or not to notify the pushing order for the additional lock is executed, and if the lottery result is a win, Notification of the stop operation order according to the determined additional lock push order is executed, and when the stop operation is performed according to this notification, the lock at the game end is executed based on the lock data after all the stops, and the game is ended Based on the lock being executed, an AT number addition (addition) lottery is performed to provide a benefit of addition of the AT number (addition).

  By configuring in this manner, during AT game or AT preparation state, it is made not to shift to the chance zone state (main CZ state) in which reel actions (for example, reel actions 1 to 8) can occur. Even if the game content is prevented from being obscured and it is not allowed to shift to the chance zone state (main CZ state), a specific internal winning combination (for example, strong chance lip) is determined The benefits based on can be given to the player as different benefits.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to give the different benefits described above can be performed by the control of the sub CPU 81, so the player's benefit and the game arcade benefit can be achieved with a simple configuration. It becomes possible to manage equity properly.

<Interrupt process by control of main CPU>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51. This process is performed every 1.1172 ms.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S320). Next, the main CPU 51 executes input port check processing described later in the description of FIG. 56 (S321). In this input port check process, for example, the presence or absence of signals of various switches and sensors connected to the main CPU 51 is confirmed.

  For example, the main CPU 51 stores information on on and off of various switches such as the start switch 16S and the stop switch 17S, and information on on and off of various sensors such as the medal sensor 35S in the main RAM 53.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a timer update process (S322). Next, the main CPU 51 executes communication data transmission processing described later in the description of FIG. 57 (S323). Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel control process described later in the explanation of FIG. 57 (S324).

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a lamp 7SEG driving process (S325). For example, the main CPU 51 displays the number of medals credited, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units. Next, the main CPU 51 restores the register (S326), and ends the regularly occurring interrupt processing.

<Input port check process>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 51 stores the previous interrupt, that is, the state of the input port before one interrupt in the main RAM 53 (S331), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 53 (S332).

  As described above, the main CPU 51 can check the states of both input ports by comparing the state of the input port before one interrupt with the current state of the input port. It is checked whether the state has changed, for example, whether the MAX bet button 15A, the 1 BET button 15B, the start lever 16 and the like have been operated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 53 (S333). For example, when the input data of the input port allocated to the start switch 16S is data indicating OFF before one interrupt, the main CPU 51 shifts to ON edge when the data indicates ON at present. The main RAM 53 stores on-edge information indicating that the input data of the input port allocated to the start switch 16S is data showing ON before one interrupt, but is data showing OFF at present. If there is, the main RAM 53 stores off-edge information indicating that it has shifted to the off-edge.

<Communication data transmission process>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing communication data transmission processing executed in step S323 of the interrupt processing under control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 subtracts one from the communication data transmission timer (S340). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the communication data transmission timer is 0 (S341).

  Here, if it is determined that the communication data transmission timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the communication data transmission process. On the other hand, when determining that the communication data transmission timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is unsent data in the communication data storage area (S342).

  Here, when it is determined that there is no unsent data in the communication data storage area (NO), the main CPU 51 generates non-operation command data, and communication data in which the generated non-operation command data is allocated to the main RAM 53. It stores in the storage area (S343).

  As the no-operation command data, information on the on-edge and off-edge of various switches and information on on and off of various sensors stored in the above-described input port check process are set as parameters. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of interrupt processing in which a command is not transmitted, and to prevent a fraudulent action on command transmission, and also to make the sub CPU 81 recognize these pieces of information, in a period during which the operation is essentially invalid. It is possible to change the effect based on an operation (for example, an operation on the MAX bet button 15A while the reel is rotating).

  In step S342, when it is determined that there is unsent data in the communication data storage area (YES), or after performing the processing of step S343, the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 14) to the communication data transmission timer. (S344).

  Next, the main CPU 51 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 42 (S345). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether transmission of communication data has been completed (S346).

  Here, when it is determined that transmission of communication data is not completed (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S345. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transmission of the communication data is completed (YES), the main CPU 51 updates the communication data storage area to clear (S347), and ends the communication data transmission process.

<Reel control processing>
FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the reel control process executed in step S324 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether a reel action has been determined (S271). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the above-described reel actions 1 to 14 (reel actions 11 to 14 includes a pseudo internal winning combination) or special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined. If the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action is determined (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a reel effect control process (S272) described later in the description of FIG. 59, and ends the reel control process. Although the illustration is omitted, the main CPU 51 also determines the execution time of the reel action, and determines whether or not the process of step S272 is to be performed. For example, since the reel actions 7 and 8 execute the reel action in the next game of the determined game, when the reel actions 7 and 8 are determined, the main CPU 51 plays the game of the next game. The processing at step S272 is performed by determining the start time (when executing the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49) as the execution time.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action is not determined (NO), the main CPU 51 executes the normal reel control process (S273), and ends the reel control process.

  Here, in the normal reel control process, the main CPU 51 controls the rotation of each reel by driving and controlling each stepping motor based on the rotation start request of each reel in the reel rotation start process (S20 in FIG. 42). Execute acceleration processing to accelerate, and drive control of each stepping motor based on each reel reaching a predetermined speed (for example, 80 revolutions / 1 minute) to maintain the predetermined speed. The processing is executed, and the stop processing for stopping the rotation of each reel is executed by controlling the drive of each stepping motor based on the rotation stop request for each reel in the stop control processing (S22 of FIG. 42).

<Reel effect control processing>
FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the reel effect control process executed in step S272 of the reel control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets data for reel effect selection according to the type of reel action (S274). Here, the data for reel effect selection is data configured as shown in an example in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes an effect target reel selection process (S275). Specifically, the main CPU 51 selects the most suitable presentation target reel in performing the reel presentation according to the set data for reel presentation selection. For example, when the reel effect selection data corresponds to a reel effect in which each reel is forward rotated in the order of left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R, in this effect target reel selection processing, the left reel is selected. The presentation target reels are selected in the order of 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The selection mode of the effect target reel is not limited to this. For example, among the reels in pseudo rotation, they may be set in a predetermined order (for example, in the order of setting the left reels), or may be set randomly. Further, the data for selecting the reel effect may include data that can identify the order in which the effect target reels are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets data for selecting a reel effect and the number of effects according to the effect target reel according to the effect target reel and selection data for excitation output (S276). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, when the data for reel effect selection is “1” and the effect target reel is the middle reel 3C, when the process of step S276 is first executed, 1 is the number of effects. The excitation output table for reverse acceleration rotation is set as selection data for excitation output. Further, in the process of step S276, when the effect target reel is changed in the effect target reel change control process of step S288 described later, the effect frequency of the portion to be resumed and the selection data for excitation output are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data (S277). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 or It is determined whether it is 2. When the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output selection data is not the symbol position adjustment data (NO), the main CPU 51 shifts the processing to step S279. On the other hand, when determining that the excitation output selection data is symbol position adjustment data (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a reel effect adjustment output process (S278) described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets an effect excitation output table based on the selection data for excitation output or the result of the reel effect adjustment output process (S279). The result of the reel effect adjustment output process will be described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the effect excitation output table that has been set, and sets the excitation direction data and the top data of the effect excitation timer (S280). Here, the effect excitation output table is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  Next, the main CPU 51 outputs excitation data based on the excitation direction data, and subtracts one from the effect excitation timer (S281). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect excitation timer is 0 (S282). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect excitation timer is not 0 (NO), the process returns to the process of step S 281.

  On the other hand, when determining that the effect excitation timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 references the set effect output table for effect, and updates the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer (S283) ). Specifically, when the excitation direction data and the leading data of the effect excitation timer are set, if it is determined that the effect excitation timer is 0, the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer are from the beginning. Update to the second data (that is, the next data). If the next data in the effect excitation output table is an end code, the data is updated to the end code.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the data in the effect excitation output table is an end code (S284). When the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the effect excitation output table is not the end code (NO), the process returns to the process of step S 281. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the effect excitation output table is the end code (YES), subsequently, whether or not the excitation output control based on the selection data for excitation output has been executed for the number of times of effect It is determined (S285). When the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has not been executed for the number of effects (NO), the process returns to the process of step S280.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has been performed for the number of effects in step S285 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the data for reel effect selection that has been set, The excitation output selection data is updated (S286). Specifically, the number of effects and the selection data for excitation output are updated to the following data. Also, if the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data (S287). When the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the reel effect selection data is not the effect phase end data (NO), the main CPU 51 executes an effect target reel change control process (S288), and returns to the process of step S276. In the effect target reel change control process, the main CPU 51 performs the reel effect, and during the effect control of one effect target reel (for example, the left reel 3L), the other effect target reels (for example, the middle reel 3C, Alternatively, it is determined whether to start or restart the effect control of the right reel 3R), and when it is determined that the start or restart should be performed, one of the effect target reels (for example, the effect target reel (for example, , And the process of changing from the left reel 3L) to another effect target reel (for example, the middle reel 3C). By configuring in this manner, for example, even if the number of effects specified for a specific effect target reel and the selection data for excitation output are large in the data for reel effect selection, the other effect target reels are interlocked Therefore, it is possible to smoothly execute the intended reel effect. Note that whether or not the effect target reel should be changed may be determined according to the specified number of effects and / or the number of selection data for excitation output, and a dedicated change control timer is set, This determination may be made based on the change control timer becoming 0 and the process of step S286 ending. Furthermore, the data for selecting the reel effect may include data indicating that the effect target reel should be changed, and data that can identify the effect target reel as the change destination.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the effect is ended for all reels (S289). ). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data or not for all the effect target reels. If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect has not ended on all the reels (NO), the process returns to the process of step S275. In addition, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect is completed for all the reels (YES), the reel effect control process is ended.

<Reel production adjustment output processing>
60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the reel effect adjustment output process executed in step S278 of the reel effect control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 (S290). When the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 (YES), the effect symbol position update process (S291) described later in the description of FIG. 62 is executed, and then the effect symbol is generated. It is determined whether the position is 0 (S292). If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is not 0 (NO), the process proceeds to step S 294.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is 0 in step S 292 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set data for reel effect selection and updates the number of effects and the selection data for excitation output (see FIG. S293). Specifically, the number of effects and the selection data for excitation output are updated to the following data. Also, if the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets an excitation output table for reverse rotation as an excitation output table for effect (S294), and ends the reel effect adjustment output process. Here, the reverse rotation excitation output table is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol position adjustment data is not symbol position adjustment data 1 in step S290 (NO), subsequently, whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is symbol position adjustment data 3 It judges (S295). When the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 3 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes effect symbol position update processing (S296) described later in the description of FIG. Then, the constant-speed rotation excitation output table 1 is set (S297), and the reel effect adjustment output process is ended. Here, the excitation output table 1 for constant speed rotation is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol position adjustment data is not the symbol position adjustment data 3 in step S295 (YES), that is, the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 2 in the description of FIG. The effect symbol position update process (S298) to be described later is executed, and subsequently, it is determined whether the effect symbol position is data of less than one rotation (S299). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol position updated in the effect symbol position update processing in step S298 is a symbol position that can be identified without detecting a reel index. That is, while detection of the reel index is performed when the reel position detection circuit 63 reaches each reference position (position where the symbol position data is 0), the main CPU 51 is based on the effect pattern position. It is determined whether it is a symbol position passing the position.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is not data for less than one rotation (NO), it sets the excitation output table for acceleration rotation as an excitation output table for effect (S300), and performs reel effect adjustment output processing finish. Here, the excitation output table for acceleration rotation is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  On the other hand, when determining that the effect symbol position is data of less than one rotation (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether it is in the effect symbol position search phase (S301). Although not shown in the example of the reel effect selection data shown in FIG. 38, a plurality of symbol position adjustment data are defined as excitation output selection data in one reel effect selection data. In that case, data indicating whether or not to compare with the design symbol position search data to be described later is further defined, and based on the data, it is determined whether or not it is the design symbol position search phase It will be done.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that it is not the effect symbol position search phase (NO), it sets the constant speed rotation excitation output table 2 as the effect excitation output table (S308), and ends the reel effect adjustment output process. . Here, the constant speed rotation excitation output table 2 is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position search phase is in progress (YES), the main CPU 51 sets effect symbol position search data and the number of searches according to the type of reel action and the effect target reel (S302). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 40, when the reel action 9 is determined and the effect target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), 2 (pattern position data is 2) as effect symbol position search data (Data indicating the position) is set, and 1 is set as the number of searches.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect symbol position matches the effect symbol position search data (S303). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position matches the effect symbol position search data (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set data for reel effect selection and updates the number of effects and the selection data for excitation output ( S304). Specifically, the number of effects and the selection data for excitation output are updated to the following data. Also, if the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data. Next, the main CPU 51 executes the process of S308 described above, and ends the reel effect adjustment output process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position and the effect symbol position search data do not match (NO), the main CPU 51 subtracts one from the number of searches (S305) and subsequently determines whether the number of searches is zero or not. (S306). When the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the effect symbol position search data (S307), and returns to the process of step S303.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S306 that the number of searches is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the process of S308 described above, and ends the reel effect adjustment output process.

<Effect pattern location update process>
FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing effect symbol position updating processing to be executed in step S291, step S296 and step S298 of the reel effect adjustment output processing shown in FIGS. 60 and 61.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets the stop position at the end of the previous game or at the end of the last reel effect as the effect symbol position (S310). That is, when the symbol position adjustment data is at the beginning of the reel effect selection data, the stop position at the end of the previous game is set as the effect symbol position, and the symbol position adjustment data is halfway or last of the reel effect selection data In the case of (1), the stop position at the end of the last reel effect (that is, at the end of excitation output control based on excitation output selection data before symbol position adjustment data) is set as the effect symbol position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the input state of the previous reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) and the input state of the current reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) (S311). Specifically, on-edge or off-edge information related to the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) stored in the input port check process shown in FIG. 56 is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is an off edge (S312). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the input data of the input port allocated to the reel position detection circuit 63 is data indicating that it was on last time but is now off.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is an off edge (YES), the main CPU 51 clears the effect symbol position (S313), and ends the effect symbol position update process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is not the off edge (NO), the main symbol position is incremented by one (S314), and the final symbol position update process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel effect (effect by the symbol variation mode) is executed based on the data for reel effect selection, and the symbol position adjustment data is defined in the data for reel effect selection. Is configured to update the effect symbol position, select the effect excitation output table according to the updated effect symbol position and the type of symbol position adjustment data, and perform excitation output control. For example, even when excitation output control is performed by the same forward rotation, excitation output for constant speed rotation if a small amount of rotation is sufficient according to the type of the updated effect pattern position and the symbol position adjustment data. When the table 1 or 2 is set and a large amount of rotation is required, the excitation output table for acceleration rotation is set. That is, since it is not necessary to constantly search for symbol positions and execute reel effects, and it is not necessary to define data for reel effect selection for all streets, it is appropriate to meet the purpose of the effects while reducing the amount of data. It becomes possible to perform a reel effect. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs in the symbol position of the reel before the start of the reel effect or during the reel effect, the deviation is adjusted without increasing the control load, and the intended reel effect is the player Can be enjoyed by

[Sub control process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 75, various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 will be described.

<Power on processing>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing power on processing of the sub CPU 81 at the time of power on.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process (S350). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs error check on the sub RAM 83 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task which is a task group of timer interrupt synchronization, and a sound control task.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 starts the lamp control task shown in FIG. 64 (S351). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 81 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 81 every two milliseconds, and in response to receiving this timer interrupt event message, It is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 starts the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S352). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 81 controls the sound output state from the speakers 20L and 20R. Next, the sub CPU 81 starts the mother task (S 353), and ends the power on processing. In the mother task, a main board communication task shown in FIG. 66 and a display control task (not shown) for controlling the display content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are activated.

<Ramp control task>
FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing a lamp control task activated in step S 351 of the power on processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes timer interrupt initialization processing (S360). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes lamp-related data initialization processing (S361).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes timer interrupt waiting (S 362). In this process, the sub CPU 81 executes a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 81 receives a timer interrupt event message every two milliseconds.

  As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, there is a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization. Also, a task group (not shown) of power supply interruption synchronization, a task group (not shown) of door monitoring unit communication synchronization, etc. may be mentioned.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S363). In this process, the task in the next priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization is basically in the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task at the next priority of the lamp control task is executed. In step S363, of the sound control tasks shown in FIG. 65, the processes of steps S372 and S373 are executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a lamp data analysis process (S364), executes a lamp effect execution process (S365), and returns to the process of step S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing a lamp control task started in step S352 of the power on processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes initialization processing of sound related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 20L, 20R (S370). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a task in the next priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes an analysis process of sound data (S372), performs a sound effect execution process (S373), and executes the process of step S371.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task started in the mother task started in step S353 shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 81 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S380), and executes a check of the received command (S381).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a command different from the previous one has been received (S382). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 returns to the process of step S 381.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the received command is a legitimate command, and creates game information from the received command and creates it The game information is stored in the sub RAM 83 (S383). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a command analysis process shown in FIG. 67 (S384), and returns to the process of step S381.

<Command analysis process>
FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing executed in step S384 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68 (S390), executes the lamp data determination process (S391), executes the sound data determination process (S392), and registers each determined data Then (S393), the command analysis process is ended.

<Determination content determination processing>
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process executed in step S390 of the command analysis process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether an initialization command has been received (S400). Here, if it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes initialization command reception processing (S401), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the initialization command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the initialization command. For example, the rendering state is restored or the rendering state is initialized based on the presence or absence of the setting change.

  On the other hand, when determining that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (S402). Here, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a medal insertion command reception process (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command. For example, based on the presence or absence of the insertion of the medal, effect data for outputting the medal insertion sound is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the start command has been received (S404). Here, if it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a start command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 69 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the start command is set. For example, during the AT game, if the internal winning combination is a push order, effect data for notifying a procedure of the stop operation which is most advantageous for the player is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S406). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (S407), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command. For example, effect data for outputting a reel rotation start sound is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S408). Here, if it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a reel stop command reception process (S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command. For example, effect data for outputting a reel stop sound is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lock command has been received (S410). Here, if it is determined that the lock command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes lock command reception processing described later in the description of FIG. 74 (S411), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the lock command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the lock command. For example, effect data for displaying an image according to the type of reel action is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lock command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S412). Here, if it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a winning operation command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 75 (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. . In the winning operation command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command. For example, effect data for outputting a payout sound corresponding to the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S414). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes bonus start command reception processing (S415), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the bonus start command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command. In the present embodiment, since AT game is configured to be relatively more advantageous than BB gaming state, unique effect data can be obtained based on the information transmitted as a bonus start command. It may be configured not to set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S416). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes bonus end command reception processing (S417), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the bonus end command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command. In the present embodiment, since AT game is configured to be relatively advantageous over BB gaming state, unique effect data can be obtained based on the information transmitted as a bonus end command. It may be configured not to set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a no-operation command has been received (S418). Here, if it is determined that the no-operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a no-operation command reception process (S419), and ends the effect content determination process.

  In the no-operation command reception process, the effect data may be varied based on the information transmitted as the no-operation command. For example, when the effect data determined in the start command reception process is effect data requiring continuous hitting of the MAX bet button 15A, the MAX bet button 15A received as a non-operation command is in the on-edge state or off edge The effect data is changed based on the state information. On the other hand, if it is determined in S418 that the no-operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process.

<Process when receiving start command>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not AT game is in progress (S430). If the sub CPU 81 determines that AT game is not in progress (NO), it executes a normal game process (S 443) described later in the explanation of FIG. 72, and ends the start command reception process. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that AT game is in progress (YES), it then determines whether or not the effect game state is “at AT state” (S431). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the above-mentioned AT preparation is in progress.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect game state is not the “at AT state” (at the AT preparation state) (NO), it sets the at-AT state transition navigation data according to the internal winning combination (S432) And the process of step S438. Here, the navigation data for transitioning to AT state is data for notifying a stop operation order in which seven medals will be paid out, when "push order small part" is determined as an internal winning combination. Also, it is data for notifying the stop operation order so that the stop operation is not performed at the left first stop when the strong chance lip is determined as the internal winning combination. Although illustration is omitted, as described above, the lottery on whether or not to notify the pushing order for the additional lock is performed, and if the lottery result is a win, the determined pushing order for the additional lock is performed. It can also be data for informing the stop operation order.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is the "at AT state" (not at the AT preparation state) (YES), subsequently, it determines whether or not it is the additional state (S433) . If it is determined that the sub CPU 81 is in the additional state (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes an in-addition state processing (S434) described later in the description of FIG. 70, and proceeds to the processing of step S437.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S 433 that it is not in the additional state (NO), whether or not the effect gaming state is the pseudo definite change state (“pseudo positive change state 1” or “pseudo positive change state 2”) It judges (S435). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is not the pseudo probability change state (NO), it proceeds to the process of step S 437, and if it is determined that the effect game state is the pseudo probability change state (YES), FIG. In step S436, the pseudo probability change state processing (S436) to be described later is executed.

  Next, if the navigation data is not set, the sub CPU 81 sets AT game navigation data according to the internal winning combination (S437). Here, the AT game in-game navigation data is basically the same as the AT transition status navigation data, but the BAR lip 1, the BAR lip 2 or the fake BAR lip is determined as the internal winning combination. In some cases, it can also be data for informing the stop operation order of the reverse push (that is, the stop operation order in which the stop operation is performed at the right first stop).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the internal winning combination is any of the bell lip 1 to 4 (S438). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not any of the bell lip 1 to 4 (NO), it ends the start command reception process. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is any of the bell lip 1 to 4 (YES), the in-AT point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 35 is referred to and based on the current point value. And perform point addition lottery (S439).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the result of the in-AT point addition lottery described above is addition (winning) (S440). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the result of the point addition lottery during AT is not addition (winning) (not maintenance (not winning)) (NO), the start command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the result of the in-AT point addition lottery is addition (winning) (YES), the in-AT point counter is incremented by 1 (S 441), and the in-AT point counter value is determined. The effect data is set (S 442), and the start command reception process is terminated.

Here, the effect data corresponding to the in-AT point counter value is effect data for causing the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 to emit light in accordance with the current value of the in-AT point counter. For example, when moving from the normal game to the AT game, the movable part 309 described above moves from the initial position to the effect position, and is controlled so that the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display 325 become visible accordingly. Ru. Then, when the in-AT point counter value becomes 1, effect data for causing the light-emitting display portion 325 to be turned on in one step is set, and when the in-AT point counter value becomes 2, the light-emitting display portion 325 is turned on in two steps. When the in-AT point counter value is 3, the effect data for causing the light emitting display 325 to be displayed in three steps is set. When the in-AT point counter value is 4, the arch cover 324 is displayed. The effect data for displaying light is set.
As a result, the player can recognize the in-AT points acquired during the AT game.

  In addition, the AT points earned during the AT game are cumulatively added, and as described later in the explanation of FIG. 75, when the acquired AT points become 4 points, the AT management difference sheet counter becomes 0 or less Even if you are able to play AT game again (continue) (that is, the right to continue AT game is granted), you won even if the in-AT points you earned are less than 4 points During AT points, at least the next AT game can be carried over.

  The movable part 309 described above is moved from the effect position to the initial position when the AT game is shifted to the normal game, and accordingly, the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display portion 325 are controlled to be invisible. Ru. Therefore, in the normal game, it is not possible to recognize the in-AT points being carried over.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during AT game, lottery of points during AT is carried out, the results are accumulated and stored, and the stored point during AT is a predetermined number of points (for example, 4 points) Since the AT game is configured so as to continue, the longer the AT game continues, the higher the possibility that the AT game will continue, so the sense of expectation of the addition during the AT game does not become monotonous, The interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the stored in-AT points are less than a predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), the player can carry over the in-AT points to at least the next AT game, so that the player can It is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after the AT game ends, which also contributes to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine.

  In addition, in normal games other than AT game, since it is configured not to notify the in-AT points being carried over, the player who starts the game from the normal game can also play the game with a sense of expectation It is possible to

<Processing during superimposition state>
FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the during-up state processing that is executed in step S434 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 subtracts one from the additional state management counter (S450). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the added state management counter is 10 or more (S451). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional state management counter is 10 or more (YES), the additional state introduction AT number addition lottery process (S 452) is executed, and the additional state processing is ended. Here, in the additional state introduction time AT number addition lottery process, for example, the AT number addition value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined AT number addition value is added to the AT management difference sheet counter. Although illustration is omitted, when the addition state AT number addition lottery processing at the time of introduction is introduced, the display of an image to the effect of transitioning to the addition state or that the addition state continued is performed, etc. The effect data is set.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional state management counter is not 10 or more (NO), it refers to the point addition lottery table in the additional state shown in FIG. Is determined (S453), and the determined point addition value is added to the point counter during the addition state (S454).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the point counter in the additional state is 100 or more (S455). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter in the additional state is 100 or more (YES), it refers to the AT number addition lottery table in the additional state shown in FIG. 36, and based on the added state management counter value. The AT count addition value is determined (S456), and the determined AT count addition value is added to the AT management difference sheet counter (S457), and the overtaking state point counter is decremented by 100 (S458). The initial value (for example, 12) is set (S459), and the process in the overloading state is ended.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter in the overtaking state is not 100 or more (NO), subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the overtaking state management counter is 0 or not (S460). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional state management counter is 0 (YES), it clears the point counter in the additional state (S 461), clears the state in the additional state (S 462), and ends the processing in the additional state. Do. Also, when it is determined that the additional state management counter is not 0 (NO), the process in the additional state is ended.

<Process during pseudo definite change state>
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-probable-state in-progress process which is executed in step S436 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the fall awaiting flag is on (S470). Here, the fall awaiting flag is a flag that is turned on in step S 480 described later, and in control of the main CPU 51, “pseudo probability state 1” or “pseudo probability state 1” is set as the effect game state However, in the control of the sub CPU 81, it is a flag for identifying that the pseudo-determination state has already ended. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall awaiting flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S 473.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fall awaiting flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (S471). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether any one of the normal lips 1 to 4 or the bell lips 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (YES), it sets navigation data for pseudo probability change state fall (S 472), and ends the pseudo probability change state processing. Here, in the pseudo probability change state fall navigation data, when the internal winning combination is any one of normal lips 1 to 4 or bell lips 1 to 4, the stop operation order in which the bell lip will be won (see FIG. 19). Data for notifying).

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S 471 that the internal winning combination does not include a bell lip (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the processing of step S 473. That is, even if the fall waiting flag is on, if the internal winning combination does not include bell lip, the sub CPU 81 executes a dummy game or in the process of step S 473 described later. Perform AT number addition lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes an AT number addition / lottery process (S 473) during the pseudo-probability state. In this pseudo definite change state AT number addition lottery process, regardless of whether or not the pseudo game is executed, for example, the AT number addition value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined AT number addition value Add to AT management difference sheet counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a dummy game is to be executed (S 474). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo game is not performed (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S 482.

  On the other hand, when determining that the pseudo game is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “pseudo probability variation state 2” (S475). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is the “pseudo probability variation state 2” (YES), it proceeds to the processing of step S 482.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is not the “pseudo probability change state 2” in step S 475 (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the fall waiting flag is on (S 476). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall awaiting flag is on (YES), the processing in the pseudo positive change state ends.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S 476 that the fall awaiting flag is not on (NO), it subtracts 1 from the pseudo probability change state management counter (S 477), and subsequently, determines whether the pseudo probability change state management counter is 0 It is determined whether or not (S478). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo probability variation state management counter is not 0 (NO), it proceeds to the processing of step S 482.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo probability variation state management counter is 0 (YES), it refers to the pseudo probability variation end lottery table shown in (e) of FIG. 30 and based on the internal winning combination. The transition state is determined (S479). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the definite variation end is determined, that is, whether or not the probable variation end is determined as the transition state (S480). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the definite variation end is not determined as the transition state (the probable variation continuation is determined) (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S 482.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S 480 that the definite variation end has been determined as the transition state (YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the fall waiting flag (S 481).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (S 482). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether any one of the normal lips 1 to 4 or the bell lips 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (YES), it sets navigation data for maintaining pseudo definite variation state (S483), and ends the processing during pseudo definite variation state. Also, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination does not include the bell lip (NO), the processing in the pseudo positive variation state ends. Here, when the internal winning combination is any one of normal lips 1 to 4 or bell lips 1 to 4, the pseudo probability variation state maintaining navigation data notifies the stop operation order (see FIG. 19) in which the bell lip does not win. It is data to do.

<Normal game processing>
FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing a normal game in progress process executed in step S443 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the internal winning combination is a fixed combination (S490). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the internal winning combination is a cherry lip, a strong cherry lip, or a strong bell. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is a determined combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S493. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not the final combination (NO), the normal game frequency counter is incremented by 1 (S 491), and then the normal game frequency counter = the number of ceiling games or not That is, it is determined whether the number of games in the normal game has reached the number of ceiling games described above (the number of ceiling games has been reduced). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter = the number of overhead games (YES), it executes an AT entry process (S493) described later in the description of FIG. 73, and proceeds to the process of step S499.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S492 that the normal game number counter is not the number of overhead games (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the normal game number counter is 1 or not (S494). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is the first game after the AT game is over. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter is 1 (YES), it refers to the mode suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 32 and based on the current mode, the mode suggestion effect (eg, mode suggestion) The effect data corresponding to one of the effects 1 to 9) is determined (S495), and the process proceeds to step S499.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter is not 1 (NO), it subsequently determines whether the number of 1's in the normal game number counter is 0 (S 496). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the first place of the normal game frequency counter is not 0 (NO), it proceeds to the process of step S499.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S 496 that the number 1 of the normal game number counter is 0 (YES), it calculates the number of remaining games by the ceiling game number-normal game number counter (S 497). With reference to the number-of-remaining-games suggestive effect lottery table shown in 33, the number-of-remaining-games suggestive effect (for example, effect data corresponding to any of mode suggestive effects 1 to 10) is determined ). In the present embodiment, in this manner, the effect indicating the number of remaining games is performed for every 10 games in the normal game.

  Next, if the effect data is not set, that is, if the effect data is not determined, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data according to the internal winning combination etc. (S499), and ends the normal game process.

<AT entry process>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing AT entry processing that is executed in step S493 of the normal game processing shown in FIG. 72 and step S525 of the lock command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets AT entry effect data (S510). Here, the AT entry effect data is effect data for notifying transition to a game from the normal game to the AT game, and for performing control to move the movable part 309 described above from the initial position to the effect position It is effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the AT game from the next game (S511), and adds 150 for the AT management difference number counter (S512).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes mode transition lottery, determines the next mode from modes A to C (S513), and determines the next ceiling game number based on the determined mode (S514). ), The normal game number counter is cleared (S515), and the AT entry processing is ended.

  In the process of step S512, the sub CPU 81 is replaced with the process of adding 150 to the AT management difference sheet counter (the above-described assignment of the basic continuation number), and the values of a plurality of AT management difference sheet counters (for example, From among 100, 150, or 200), the value of the AT management difference sheet counter to be added by lottery may be determined and the process of adding may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of basic continuations given and to diversify the number of continuations of AT gaming.

<Process when receiving lock command>
FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing lock command reception processing executed in step S411 of the effect content determination processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a special reel action is to be executed (S520). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether any one of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is to be executed. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the special reel action is to be executed (YES), it adds the AT number addition value corresponding to the type of the special reel action to the AT management difference sheet counter (S 521), and receives the lock command When the process ends. Here, for example, when the special reel action 1 is executed, the AT number addition value is 0, and substantially no AT number is added, but when the special reel action 2 is executed, the AT number is added As an addition value, 300 is added to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter, and when the special reel action 3 is executed, 400 is added to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter as the AT number addition value, and the special reel When the action 4 is executed, 500 is added to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter as an AT number addition value.

  In the process of step S 521, the sub CPU 81 substitutes for the process of adding the value of the AT management difference sheet counter according to the type of special reel action (the above-described addition continuation number is applied), and for a plurality of AT management. From among the values of the difference sheet counter (for example, 300, 400, 500, or 1000), the value of the AT management difference sheet counter to be added by lottery may be determined and added. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the number of added continuations to be given, and to diversify the number of continuations of AT gaming.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special reel action is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the reel action 9 or 10 is executed (S522). If it is determined that the reel action 9 or 10 is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets an initial value (for example, 3) to the pseudo-probable state management counter (S523), and ends the process upon lock command reception. Do.

  If it is determined in step S522 that the reel action 9 or 10 is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is executed (S524) . If it is determined that any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the AT entry processing (S525) shown in FIG. 73, and ends the lock command reception processing. .

  If it is determined in step S524 that one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not a pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (S526). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes AT number addition lottery based on the pseudo internal winning combination, and adds the lottery result to the AT management difference sheet counter (S527), and the lock command reception process ends.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S 526 that the pseudo internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), the sub CPU 81 then determines whether lock data is to be executed after all the stops (S 528). That is, when the internal winning combination is a high chance lip, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lock at the game end is executed by the stop operation being performed in the pressing order for the additional lock.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S 528 that lock data is to be executed after all stops (YES), the lock time AT number addition lottery process (S 529) is performed after all stops, and a lock command reception process is performed. finish. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the lock data is not to be executed after all the stop (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process on lock command reception. In this post-stop lock time AT number addition lottery process, the sub CPU 81 determines, for example, an AT number addition value by lottery (for example, determines any of 100 to 500 as an AT number addition value), and selects a lottery result. Add to AT management difference sheet counter. In addition, the specific benefit provided when the lock data is executed after all shutdown is not limited to this. For example, as a specific benefit, the sub CPU 81 may control to shift to the above-described additional state. Further, for example, as a specific benefit, the main CPU 51 may control to shift to the above-described pseudo-probability state and set a special value (for example, 10) to the pseudo-probability state management counter.

<Process when receiving prize operation command>
FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing a winning operation command reception process executed in step S413 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not AT game is in progress (S540). When the sub CPU 81 determines that AT game is not in progress (NO), the processing at the time of winning operation command reception is ended. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that AT game is in progress (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not it is in the additional state (S 541). When it is determined that the sub CPU 81 is in the additional state (YES), the processing at the time of winning operation command reception is ended. In the present embodiment, in this way, it is assumed that the subtraction process (see step S546 described later) for the AT management difference sheet counter is not executed in the additional state.

  If it is determined in step S541 that the sub CPU 81 is not in the additional state (NO), the sub CPU 81 then determines whether or not the internal winning combination has been won except for the BAR lip and the left first stop (S542). Specifically, in sub CPU 81, BAR lip 1 or BAR lip 2 is determined as an internal winning combination, and is the first stop operation of other than left reel 3L to win one of the winning replays? Decide whether or not. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination has won a prize other than the BAR lip and the left first stop (YES), it sets the additional state from the next game (S543), and sets the initial state management counter to the initial value ( For example, 12) is set (S544), and the processing at the time of winning operation command reception is ended.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S 542 that the internal winning combination has not been won except for the BAR lip and the left first stop (NO), then the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the small winning combination has been won. (S545). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination has not been won (NO), it ends the winning operation command reception process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination has been won (YES), the difference number calculated from the number of payouts (see FIGS. 14 a and 14 b) −the number of inserted sheets (for example, three) is AT managed. The difference sheet counter is subtracted (S546). In the present embodiment, the management of the difference in the number of AT games is realized in this manner.

  In step S545, the sub CPU 81 may determine whether or not one of the bells has been won instead of whether or not the small winning combination has been won. Specifically, one of the "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", which are "push order small part", is determined as the internal winning combination as the internal winning combination. If it is determined that one of the bells has been won, "7" is set as the number of payouts regardless of whether or not it is actually paid out, and the processing in step S546 is executed. You may do it. That is, the AT management difference sheet counter may be a counter updated at the winning of the “push order small part”. By configuring in this way, for example, in the AT game, between the player who has performed the stop operation ignoring the notified stop operation order and the player who performed the stop operation according to the notified stop operation order, Since there is a difference in the profit obtained, it is possible to enhance the sense of tension in the AT game and to improve the interest of the game.

  The sub CPU 81 may execute the process of step S546 by executing the same determination as step S238 of the during-AT state management process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the sub CPU 81 determines in step S 545 whether or not one of the bells has been won, rather than whether or not the small winning combination has been won, it is determined that one of the bells has been won. The process of step S546 may be performed. In the present embodiment, the AT game winning number counter is incremented by 1 in S239 following step S238 described above, and when the AT gaming number win number counter reaches a predetermined number (for example, 38), the external signal 1 is turned off. (See FIG. 53). That is, by configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the condition in which the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 fluctuates (for example, from on to off) and the condition in which the AT game in the sub CPU 51 ends. it can. In this case, it is desirable to synchronize the conditions under which the AT game in the sub CPU 51 starts with the conditions under which the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 fluctuates (for example, from off to on).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the AT management difference sheet counter is 0 or less (S547). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT management difference sheet counter is not 0 or less (NO), it ends the winning operation command reception process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT management difference sheet counter is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the during-AT point counter is 4 or more (S548).

  If it is determined that the in-AT point counter is 4 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 150 for the AT management difference sheet counter (S549) and subtracts 4 from the in-AT point counter (S550). The process at the time of operation command reception is ended. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the in-AT point counter is not 4 or more (NO), it sets the normal game from the next game and sets the determined mode and the number of ceiling games (S 551). The process at the time of operation command reception is ended. In the present embodiment, in this manner, the AT game is continued based on the points in the AT.

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the in-AT point counter is 4 or more is not limited to the one executed at the end of the AT game. For example, in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69, a stock counter indicating that one AT game continues (ie, the right to continue the AT game) based on the fact that the in-AT point counter becomes 4 1 is added, and it is determined whether or not this stock counter is 1 or more at the end of AT game, and control is also made to continue 1 set of AT game when the stock counter is 1 or more. Good. In this case, in place of the effect data for lighting the arch cover 324 described above, or together with this, set effect data for notifying that one set of AT game continues, and during AT game, AT game It is also possible to notify that one set continues.

[Another embodiment of a pachislot machine]
In the present embodiment, special reel actions 1 to 4, reel actions 1 to 14, or pseudo games are adopted as the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode), but the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, other embodiments can also be adopted as a reel effect (effect according to a symbol variation mode). Next, with reference to FIG. 76 to FIG. 79, reel effects (effects by a symbol variation mode) according to other embodiments will be described. In the description of FIG. 76 to FIG. 79, the description overlapping with the content already described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 75 is omitted.

<Lock lottery processing>
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process performed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42 in another embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination includes Cherry Lip A (S 560). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not either cherry lip or strong cherry lip (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination does not include the cherry lip A (NO), the lock lottery process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination includes cherry lip A (YES), the special reel action is set (S 561), the special control flag is turned on (S 562), and the lock lottery processing is ended. Do. The condition that the special reel action is set in step S 561 is not limited to the case where it is determined that the internal winning combination includes cherries A, for example, whether or not the special reel action is to be executed is simply determined. A lottery may be made based on the lottery result.

<Lock processing at game start>
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in step S19 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42 in another embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether a special reel action has been determined (S565). When the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action is not determined (NO), the game start lock execution process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action is determined (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the left stop button is on (S565). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether the left stop button 17L is depressed (simulated stop operation) by the player and the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is on. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left stop button is not on (is off) (NO), the game start lock execution process is ended. Here, for example, in the special reel action, each reel starts pseudo-rotation in the same manner as normal rotation (that is, at the same or substantially the same rotation speed as normal rotation) by forward rotation, for effect described later When the value of the timer becomes 0, it is a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts normal rotation as it is.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S566 that the left stop button is on (YES), it sets the effect timer according to the pseudo stop start position (S567), and ends the lock execution process at the game start Do. Here, the pseudo stop start position indicates a symbol position (for example, symbol position data located in the middle of the left reel 3L) when the left stop button 17L is operated while the special reel action is being performed.

  Also, to set the effect timer according to the pseudo stop start position, the number of symbols at which the pseudo stop start position is seen from the position where the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 3L (the symbol position data 12 and 17) It indicates that the rendering timer is set according to whether it is away. For example, when the value of the effect timer for one symbol is "17" (about 0.019 seconds), the position at which the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 3L and the pseudo stop start position is one symbol If separated, "17" (about 0.019 seconds) is set as the value of the effect timer, and the position where the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 3L and the pseudo stop start position are 14 symbols If it is separated, "238 (17 x 14)" (about 0.266 seconds) is set as the value of the effect timer. Here, assuming that the value of the pulse counter required to move one symbol (the symbol counter is incremented by 1) is "17", that is, in the special reel action, as the value of the effect timer, " A value corresponding to an integral multiple of the time required to move one symbol is set in accordance with how many symbols the pseudo stop start position is separated from the position at which the symbol "Cherry" stops.

  In the other embodiments, the value of the presentation timer is set according to how many symbols the pseudo stop start position is separated from the position at which the "cherry" symbol stops, but it is limited to this. However, the value of the presentation timer may be set according to the lottery. Specifically, the same lottery value is assigned to symbol position data “0” to “19” and lottery is performed (for example, lottery value “12” is assigned to each symbol position data, 12 / One symbol position data is determined by lottery with a probability of 256. Also, for the lottery value “16” which is a fraction of the lottery value when the lottery value “12” is assigned to each symbol position data, the symbols are again displayed The position data will be re-lotted.) The value of the presentation timer according to the determined symbol position data (for example, the pseudo stop start position viewed from the symbol position according to the symbol position data determined as a result of the lottery) Depending on how many symbols are separated, it is possible to set the value of the effect timer) at which the execution of the lock is terminated at the start of the game. Further, the lottery of the symbol position at which the execution of the lock at the game start end is finished may be performed at the time of the start operation.

  In the other embodiments, although the left reel 3L and the left stop button 17L are described as an example, the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead of the left reel 3L and the left stop button 17L, The same processing may be performed on the reel 3C, the middle stop button 17R, the right reel 3L, and the right stop button 17R, or the same processing may be performed on all of them.

<Input port check process>
FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. The processes of steps S570 to S573 in FIG. 78 are the same as the processes of steps S330 to S333 in FIG.

  The main CPU 51 determines whether the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (S574). If it is determined that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the input port check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the left stop button is on (S575). That is, the main CPU 51 turns on the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L based on the left stop button 17L being pressed by the player while the special reel action is being executed, and the special reel action is ended. Based on the fact that the pressing operation is continued, it is determined whether the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L remains in the on state. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left stop button is not on (is off) (NO), the input port check process is ended.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S575 that the left stop button is on (YES), the main CPU 51 requests output of a special on-edge signal (S576), and ends the input port check process. Here, to request the output of the special on-edge signal means that the on-edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is pseudo-outputted even when the left stop button 3L is kept pressed. Or the on-edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is once turned off and then turned on again.

  In the present embodiment, normally, after the process of step S20 of FIG. 42, the stop operation to each reel is permitted based on the fact that each reel has been rotated at a constant speed, and thereafter, the input port check is performed. In the processing, execution of stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is started based on the on-edge information being stored as input data of the input port assigned to the stop switch 17S. On the other hand, in the other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, by performing the processing of step S576, the stop switch is assigned to the stop switch 17S even if the stop button is still pressed. On-edge information is stored as input data of the input port. Here, even if the stop button is kept pressed, the manner in which on-edge information is stored as input data of the input port allocated to the stop switch 17S is not limited to this. For example, at the timing when the stop operation to each reel is permitted, it is always monitored whether or not the stop switch 17S is on, and if it is on, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is executed. It may be started. In this case, the processes of steps S574 to S576 become unnecessary.

  Thus, in other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, each reel starts pseudo rotation by forward rotation, and when the player performs a pseudo stop operation, a specific symbol position (for example, The effect timer is set based on the symbol position at which the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle and the pseudo stop start position (for example, the symbol position at the middle when the pseudo stop operation is performed). Then, when the value of the effect timer becomes 0, a stop request signal (for example, a special on-edge signal) of the reel is output even when the player keeps pressing the stop button, and the reel at a specific symbol position Will stop.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the other embodiments, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding symbols has been changed by using the reel effect, so the interest to the stop operation is remarkable. It is possible to improve.

  Also, while the combination of the symbols pertaining to Cherry Lip A is "Cherry-ANY-ANY", the player can easily do this by keeping the left stop button 17L pressed during the special reel action. "Cherry" symbol can be stopped at the middle of the left reel 3L. That is, since it is possible to easily detect that the specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed combination) is established, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the game.

  Also, if the internal winning combination is cherry lip or strong cherry lip, even if the symbol combination related to cherry lip A is not displayed stopped, the symbol combinations related to other replays are always displayed stopped. (See FIGS. 17 and 19), the player does not suffer any particular disadvantage. Therefore, even if it is possible to easily stop the "cherry" symbol in the middle of the left reel 3L, there is no adjustment that would impair the fairness of the game.

<Stop operation continuation suggestion indication>
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of the stop operation continuation suggestion effect according to another embodiment. Here, the stop operation continuation suggestion effect is, for example, a case where a special reel action is determined in the game start time lock execution process shown in FIG. 49, and lock command data including that effect is generated, In the communication data transmission process stored in the communication data storage area and shown in FIG. 57, when the lock command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, an effect to be executed by control is shown to the sub CPU 81.

  As shown in FIG. 79, for example, when the special reel action is executed, the sub CPU 81 controls the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an image “Press and hold the left stop button!”. After that, when the left stop button 3L is pseudo-stopped and the left stop button 3L is kept pressed, if the effect timer becomes 0, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L. .

  As described above, in the other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, the notification that the pressing of the stop button based on the pseudo stop operation should be continued is performed. It is possible to reliably enjoy an effect that can give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding symbols has been changed. In addition, when the establishment of the specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed combination) is the execution condition of the special reel action, the player is notified that the specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed combination) is established. It can be enjoyed surely.

  As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting fluctuation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and displayed on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means And a profit giving means for giving a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) An advantageous gaming state control means (for example, sub CPU 81) which controls an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) which is advantageous for the player until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied based on the predetermined starting condition being satisfied. And notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the lamp group 21, the speakers 20L and 20R) for performing notification of a plurality of types of information to the player, and notification control for controlling the notification executed by the notification means Means (e.g., sub CPU 81), wherein the advantageous game state control means has at least a predetermined number of games played in the normal game state different from the advantageous game state (e.g., in the normal game) Ceiling game number digesting) as the predetermined start condition, and the notification control means is configured to play the specified number of games played in the normal gaming state. Each time (for example, 10 games) is played, a plurality of specific notification data (for example, the number of remaining games suggested effect 1 to 10) based on the number of games (for example, the number of remaining games) up to the predetermined number of games If one specific notification data is determined from among the effect data corresponding to a), the notification according to the determined specific notification data is executed by the notification means, and the specific notification data is determined by the notification control means The specific notification data is determined at a different determination ratio for each range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games (for example, referring to the number-of-remaining-games suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 33) A game machine characterized in that effect data corresponding to a suggested effect is determined.

  According to this gaming machine, in the normal gaming state (for example, normal gaming), each time a game of a specific number of games is performed, a notification (for example, the remaining game number suggestion effect) corresponding to the specific notification data is executed As a result, it is possible to add a new game characteristic of estimating the number of remaining games before transitioning to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and reduce the decrease in the operation of the game machine.

  Moreover, according to this gaming machine, as the number of games in the normal gaming state (for example, the normal game) increases, a notification (for example, effect to suggest the number of remaining games) will be executed according to many specific notification data Therefore, since the player who has many games can grasp the number of remaining games more accurately, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when estimating the number of remaining games before transitioning to the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming), notification according to one specific notification data (for example, the number of remaining games In some cases, it can be inferred by the execution of the suggestion effect), and in some cases it can be inferred by the execution of the notice (for example, the remaining game number suggesting effect) depending on a plurality of specific notice data. It is possible to dramatically improve the interest of itself (for example, the effect indicating the number of remaining games).

  In addition, the plurality of specific notification data includes at least a first specific notification data (for example, effect data corresponding to any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 3), a second specific notification data (for example, a remaining game) Effect data corresponding to number suggestion effect 4), third specific notification data (for example, effect data corresponding to number-of-remaining games suggestion effect 5) and fourth specific notification data (for example, number-of-remaining games suggestion effect 8 to 10) When the range of the number of games until the predetermined number of games is within a predetermined range (for example, the number of remaining games is within 240 games). Only, the first specific notification data is determined with a predetermined probability, the range of the number of games until reaching the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range, the first range (for example, remaining When the number of games is in the range of 101 to 240 games, or the number of remaining games is in the range of 31 to 50 games, the second specific broadcast data is generated with a first probability (for example, a probability of 2000/32768). The second probability is lower than the first probability when the second range (for example, the number of remaining games is 51 to 100, or the number of remaining games is 11 to 30) is determined. The second specific notification data is determined with a probability (for example, a probability of 100/32768), and the range of the number of games until reaching the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range, and the second range And the third specific broadcast data is determined with the first probability, and the third specific broadcast data is determined with the second probability when the first range is satisfied, The predetermined number of games A third probability that is lower than the first probability and higher than the second probability when the range of game numbers until the game is out of the predetermined range (for example, the number of remaining games is 241 games or more) Determine the second specific notification data or the third specific notification data (for example, the probability of 300/32768), and the range of the number of games until reaching the predetermined number of games is in any range A fourth probability higher than the predetermined probability and the first probability (for example, a probability of 10000/32768, a probability of 9300/32768, a probability of 9000/32768, a probability of 10522/32768, or a probability of 10524/32768 A game machine characterized by determining the fourth specific notification data by probability).

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent monotony in estimating the number of remaining games before transitioning to the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) by complicating the determination of the specific notification data. The gameplay can be made more diverse.

  A profit corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means and symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns is given A gaming machine provided with profit giving means (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) and notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying the player of information. Internal winning combination determination means (for example, internal lottery processing by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a start operation of the player (for example, an operation to the start lever 16); Start changing the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 51 and reel control) Processing) and symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, main) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) Reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the CPU 51 and that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, "strong chance lip" is determined as an internal winning combination, "special lip A1 to 6" or "special lip B" The gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”) to the first gaming state (for example, “main CZ state 1”) based on any symbol combination being stopped In the first gaming state, when a specific transition condition is established during a specific number of games (for example, during 8 games), the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second play Gaming state transition control means (for example, transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state to the normal gaming state) when transitioning to a state (for example, “at AT state”) and the specific transition condition is not established For example, main effect means (e.g., an effect by reel actions 1 to 8) for effect management (e.g., effects by reel actions 1 to 8) displayed on the symbol display means in the first gaming state and the state management process by the main CPU 51). Lock execution means for executing a lock to invalidate the game operation by the player according to the reel effect control processing by the main CPU 51 and the effect by the symbol variation mode performed by the main effect means in the first gaming state For example, main control means (for example, main CPU 51) including a game start lock execution process by the main CPU 51), and If the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state by the gaming state transition control means, the sub effect means (for example, by the sub CPU 81 to notify the information of the advantageous stop operation related to the application of the game medium by the notification means Sub control means (for example, sub CPU 81) including processing at the time of start command reception), and the specific transition condition is that effects by a specific symbol variation mode are performed by the main effect means (for example, reel action) 5 to 8 are to be executed).

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to apply the privilege according to the type of effect (for example, reel action) according to the symbol variation mode to be executed at the time of execution of the lock (for example, shift to AT game). The sense of expectation in the chance zone state (for example, "main CZ state 1") that is easy to be implemented can be significantly improved.

  Further, the main effect means determines the symbol variation mode based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means for each game in the first gaming state (for example, during the normal game by the main CPU 51) Determination of the reel action in the lottery process), the game state transition control means is a case where the specific symbol variation mode (for example, the reel action 5 to 8) is not determined by the main effect means, and a predetermined symbol variation When an aspect (for example, the reel action 3 or 4) is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the high probability first gaming state (for example, "main CZ state 2"), and the main effect means performs the high probability first (1) In the gaming state, the specific symbol variation mode is determined with higher probability than the first gaming state (for example, the main CZ state reel by the main CPU 51) Gaming machine, characterized in that the lottery) by transfection lottery table.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to diversify the aspect of the effect (for example, the reel action) according to the symbol variation aspect to improve the interest of the game, and also the effect according to the symbol variation aspect to be provided with a bonus For example, even in the case where the reel action 5 to 8 at which AT game is started is not determined, in the chance zone state (for example, “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2”) lock execution is likely to be performed. It is possible to prevent the sense of expectation from falling.

  In addition, the effect by the symbol fluctuation aspect, the symbol is fluctuated stepwise according to the aspect (for example, reverse rotation) different from the fluctuation of the symbol started by the symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, each reel is one step to The effect by the specific symbol variation mode and the effect by the predetermined symbol variation mode are different (for example, five steps for the reel action 5 and 7, the reel) A game machine characterized in that each reel is moved in six steps in actions 6 and 8 while it is changed in four steps in reel action 3 and in four steps in reel action 4.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to gradually improve the player's sense of expectation when the effect (for example, the reel action) according to the symbol variation mode is executed, and at the same time it is intuitive Can be made to understand.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting fluctuation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and displayed on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means And a profit giving means for giving a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) An advantageous gaming state control means (for example, sub CPU 81) which controls an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) which is advantageous for the player until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied based on the predetermined starting condition being satisfied. And, in the advantageous game state, a point based on the fact that a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, any of bell lip 1 to 4) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. A point number giving means for giving a number (for example, processing when a start command is received by the sub CPU 81), and a point number storage means for accumulating the number of points given by the point number giving means (for example, in-AT point counter) The presence is based on the fact that the number of points stored by the point number storage means has become a predetermined number (for example, "4"). The right to continue the advantageous gaming state by the continuation right granting means (for example, the processing of S549 in the processing at the time of winning operation command reception by the control of the sub CPU 81) which grants the right to continue the gaming state The point number updating means (for example, the process of S550 in the process of receiving a winning operation command by the control of the sub CPU 81) that subtracts the predetermined number from the point number stored by the point number storage means based on And the advantageous gaming state control means continues the advantageous gaming state by the continuation right granting means when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied (for example, the AT management difference sheet number counter becomes 0 or less). If the right to cause the predetermined termination condition is satisfied again, the advantageous gaming If the predetermined number of points is stored when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the point number storage means controls at least the next time by the advantageous game state control means. A gaming machine characterized by carrying over the stored number of points until being controlled to the advantageous gaming state.

  According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, any of Bell Lips 1 to 4) is determined during the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming), points (for example, points during AT) are awarded. Since the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) continues when the number of points granted and stored reaches a predetermined number of points (for example, 4 points), during the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) It is possible to improve the interest of the game without the sense of expectation of the addition being monotonous.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, even when the stored points (for example, points in AT) are less than a predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), at least the next advantageous gaming state is that point Since it is configured to carry over (for example, AT game), it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game immediately after the advantageous gaming state ends, which also contributes to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine. Become.

  The game system further includes point number notification means (for example, an arch cover 324 and a light emission display unit 325 controlled by the sub CPU 81) for notifying of the number of points stored in the point number storage means in the advantageous game state. The point number notification means does not notify the number of points in a gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state (for example, a normal game) when the number of points is carried over by the point number storage means (for example, sub A game machine characterized by moving the movable part 309 from the effect position to the initial position under the control of the CPU 81.

  According to this gaming machine, in the gaming state (for example, normal gaming) other than the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming), it is configured not to notify the carried over points (for example, points during AT) Even a player who starts the game from the normal game can play the game with a sense of expectation.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and a normal game control means (for example, main CPU 51 and Sub-CPU 81), normal game operation detection means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting normal game operation by the player in the normal game, and pseudo game control for controlling the progress of the pseudo game Means (for example, main CPU 51 and sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detection means for detecting a pseudo game operation by a player in the pseudo game, for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S, and predetermined start conditions Game for a predetermined number of games based on the fact that An advantageous gaming state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) which is advantageous to the game player, and the normal game operation detection means performs at least a start operation (for example, , Start lever 16) and stop operation (for example, operation to stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the normal game control means is based on detection of the start operation, Based on the detection of the start operation, a symbol variation start unit (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, an internal winning combination An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining the stop operation Symbol fluctuation stopping means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the reel stop control process by the main CPU 51 and Reel control processing), and profit giving means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for giving a profit according to the combination of stopped symbols when the fluctuation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop means Normal game addition determining means (for example, for determining whether to add the predetermined number of games based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means) and medal payout processing) and the advantageous gaming state , The processing of S 474 in the processing during the pseudo probability change state under the control of the sub CPU 81) and the normal game in the advantageous game state Lock determination means (for example, lottery processing during pseudo probability change state by the main CPU 51) for determining whether or not to execute a lock for invalidating a game operation for a predetermined period, and execution of the lock is determined by the lock determination means And the lock execution means (for example, the game start time lock execution process by the main CPU 51) to execute the lock, and the pseudo game operation detection means executes the lock by the lock execution means. When the game is being played, the pseudo game operation (for example, the operation to the MAX bet button 15A, the operation to the start lever 16, the operation to the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the pseudo game control means When the lock is executed once by the lock execution means, the number of times of pseudo game determination for determining the number of pseudo games is determined The dummy game operation when the stage (for example, lottery processing during pseudo probability change state by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo game count determined by the pseudo game count determination means is not 0 (for example, the pseudo game count counter is not 0) Pseudo internal winning combination determining means (for example, lock execution processing at the game start by the main CPU 51) that determines a pseudo internal winning combination based on the detection of a false internal winning combination, and the pseudo internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state Pseudo game addition determining means (for example, the processing of S527 in the process of receiving a lock command by the control of the sub CPU 81) for determining whether to add the predetermined number of games based on the simulated internal winning combination determined by , And the pseudo game number determination means determines a plurality of pseudo game numbers (for example, the pseudo game number lottery Based on Buru, gaming machine, which is a pseudo-game number determination) possible.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and a normal game control means (for example, main CPU 51 and Sub-CPU 81), normal game operation detection means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting normal game operation by the player in the normal game, and pseudo game control for controlling the progress of the pseudo game Means (for example, main CPU 51 and sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detection means for detecting a pseudo game operation by a player in the pseudo game, for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S, and predetermined start conditions Game for a predetermined number of games based on the fact that An advantageous gaming state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) which is advantageous to the game player, and the normal game operation detection means performs at least a start operation (for example, , Start lever 16) and stop operation (for example, operation to stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the normal game control means is based on detection of the start operation, Based on the detection of the start operation, a symbol variation start unit (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, an internal winning combination An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining the stop operation Symbol fluctuation stopping means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the reel stop control process by the main CPU 51 and Reel control processing), and profit giving means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for giving a profit according to the combination of stopped symbols when the fluctuation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop means Normal game addition determining means (for example, for determining whether to add the predetermined number of games based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means) and medal payout processing) and the advantageous gaming state , The processing of S 474 in the processing during the pseudo probability change state under the control of the sub CPU 81) and the normal game in the advantageous game state Lock determination means (for example, lottery processing during pseudo probability change state by the main CPU 51) for determining whether or not to execute a lock for invalidating a game operation for a predetermined period, and execution of the lock is determined by the lock determination means And the lock execution means (for example, the game start time lock execution process by the main CPU 51) to execute the lock, and the pseudo game operation detection means executes the lock by the lock execution means. When the game is being played, the pseudo game operation (for example, the operation to the MAX bet button 15A, the operation to the start lever 16, the operation to the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the pseudo game control means When the lock is executed once by the lock execution means, the number of times of pseudo game determination for determining the number of pseudo games is determined The dummy game operation when the stage (for example, lottery processing during pseudo probability change state by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo game count determined by the pseudo game count determination means is not 0 (for example, the pseudo game count counter is not 0) Pseudo internal winning combination determining means (for example, lock execution processing at the game start by the main CPU 51) that determines a pseudo internal winning combination based on the detection of a false internal winning combination, and the pseudo internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state Pseudo game addition determining means (for example, the processing of S527 in the process of receiving a lock command by the control of the sub CPU 81) for determining whether to add the predetermined number of games based on the simulated internal winning combination determined by , The first mode (e.g., "pseudo probability variation state 1"), and the pseudo game relative to the first mode The second mode (for example, "pseudo probability variation state 2") in which the number of pseudo games determined by the number determining means is increased is based on a predetermined transition condition (for example, whether or not the high probability transition lottery is won). Mode transition means for shifting to the second game mode, and the pseudo game frequency determination means must determine the plurality of pseudo game times if the mode transition means has shifted to the second mode. A game machine characterized by

  Further, the pseudo game operation detection means detects at least a pseudo start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16) and a pseudo stop operation (for example, an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R) as the pseudo game operation. It is possible that the pseudo internal winning combination determining means determines a pseudo internal winning combination based on the detection of the pseudo start operation, and the pseudo game control means detects the pseudo operation. Based on the pseudo symbol variation start means (for example, the pseudo game process and the reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) for pseudo start of the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the pseudo stop operation is detected Of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means according to the simulated internal winning combination determined by the pseudo internal winning combination determining means based on the Pseudo-pseudo symbol variation stopping means for stopping (e.g., pseudo-game process and the reel effect control process of the main CPU 51) a gaming machine, characterized in that a, further comprising a.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, during the pseudo-ceremony state, not only the number of advantageous game states based on the internal winning combination (for example, the number of ATs), but also the opportunity for additional lottery of the advantageous gaming state based on the pseudo internal winning combination Since the opportunity of additional lottery of the number of times (for example, AT number) will also be granted, it is possible to expect a plurality of additional lottery in one unit game, and improve the interest of the game concerning the additional Can.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, by using the pseudo game, for example, it is possible to generate a plurality of lotterys in a shorter time than the specified time set in the gaming machine, for example, the pseudo probability state It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the additional lottery state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, in the second mode (for example, “pseudo probability variation state 2”), when the pseudo game is executed, the number of times of pseudo games performed multiple times (for example, twice or more) is always As it will be determined, it is possible to enjoy the opportunity of additional lottery of the number of advantageous gaming states (for example, the number of ATs) based on the pseudo internal winning combination multiple times, for example, advantageous for the player of pseudo probability variation state The addition lottery status can be diversified.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting fluctuation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and displayed on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means And a profit giving means for giving a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) And advantageous gaming state control means (for example, sub CPU 81) for controlling an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) which is advantageous for the player during a predetermined number of games based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition; In the advantageous gaming state, a specific start condition is established in the advantageous gaming state (for example, management of a difference number counter for AT management by the sub CPU 81) and the gaming number management means for managing the predetermined number of gamings For example, “BAR Lip 1” or “BAR Lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, and by performing the first stop operation except for the left reel 3L, any winning replay is won, and the additional condition is 2 Based on the game digest) until a particular end condition is met (eg, the remaining 10 games are And an additional game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling to an additional game state (for example, an additional state) which is a game state for adding a predetermined number of game times, the game number management means comprises In the game, the predetermined game number is not updated (for example, the process of S 541 in the process of receiving a prize operation command under control of the sub CPU 81), and the additional game state control means determines the specific game state in the additional game state The point number determination means (for example, processing during the addition state by the sub CPU 81) determined by lottery the number of points until each end condition of the game is accumulated, and the point number determined by the point number determination means is accumulated and stored Point number storage means (for example, point counter during superimposition state), and the point number storage means Means for determining the number of additional games to be added to the predetermined number of games when the predetermined number of points (for example, "100") or more are stored. And the point number storing means stores the number of points equal to or more than the predetermined number, and when the specific end condition is satisfied, the additional game is performed until the specific end condition is satisfied again. In the case where the number of points exceeding the predetermined number is stored by the additional game state continuation means (for example, the process during the additional state by the sub CPU 81) for continuing the state, and the point number storage means, the specific end condition is In the case of the additional game state continued by the additional game state continuation means when established, the amount exceeding the predetermined number Gaming machine which comprises a number of points carryover means carried over Into number (e.g., the processing of S458 in the plus state processing by the control of the sub CPU 81), a.

  According to this gaming machine, the additional game state (for example, the additional state) functions as a state in which the number of advantageous gaming states (for example, the number of ATs) is increased. Therefore, even if the number of advantageous gaming states can not be increased in the additional gaming state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by having the player surely enjoy the benefit of the increase in medals. it can. In addition, since the points (for example, points during the addition state) to be cumulatively added during the addition state can be carried over when the addition state continues, there is no waste in the lottery result during the addition state. It is possible to further improve the expectation of the lottery in the additional state.

  In addition, the specific end condition is that the number of points greater than the predetermined number is stored by the number-of-points storage means, or the number of points greater than the predetermined number is not stored by the number-of-points storage means The number of times the game has been performed, and the number-of-additional-games determining means is the number of points stored in the number-of-points storage means. A gaming machine characterized by determining the number of additional games based on whether it is a game (for example, an additional state management counter value).

  According to this gaming machine, it is prevented that the extra lottery is monotonous in the extra game state (for example, the extra state), and the interest of the game is maintained even in the case of being repeatedly controlled to the extra game state. Can.

  A profit corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means and symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns is given A gaming machine provided with profit giving means (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) and notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying the player of information. Internal winning combination determination means (for example, internal lottery processing by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a start operation of the player (for example, an operation to the start lever 16); Start changing the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 51 and reel control) Processing) and symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, main) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) It is determined that a specific internal winning combination (for example, “cherry lip”, “strong cherry lip” or “strong bell”) is determined by the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the CPU 51 and the internal winning combination determining means. Based on, the advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU 81) which shifts the game state from the next game to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player from the normal game state (for example, normal game). The particular internal winning combination may be a first particular internal winning combination (eg "strong cherry lip") and a second particular internal winning combination (eg "cherry" B) and the first specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means In the case where the result of the predetermined lottery is a win (for example, when any one of the special reel actions 2 to 4 is determined), the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game When the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the predetermined lottery result is not performed (for example, the special reel action 2 to 4 is executed). When it is a winning game (for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined), an effect by the second symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game (for example, the special reel action 1 Based on the fact that the specific internal winning combination has been determined by the main effect means (for example, the reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) performing the execution of the above and the internal winning combination determining means Basic continuation number giving means (for example, AT entry processing by the sub CPU 81) for giving the number (for example, adding 150 to the AT management difference sheet counter), and the first symbol variation mode by the main effect means A gaming machine, comprising: an addition continuation number giving unit (for example, processing at the time of receiving a lock command by the sub CPU 81) for giving an addition continuation number in the advantageous gaming state based on the effect being performed.

  A profit corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means and symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns is given A gaming machine provided with profit giving means (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) and notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying the player of information. Internal winning combination determination means (for example, internal lottery processing by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a start operation of the player (for example, an operation to the start lever 16); Start changing the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 51 and reel control) Processing) and symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, main) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) It is determined that a specific internal winning combination (for example, “cherry lip”, “strong cherry lip” or “strong bell”) is determined by the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the CPU 51 and the internal winning combination determining means. Based on, the advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU 81) which shifts the game state from the next game to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player from the normal game state (for example, normal game). The particular internal winning combination may be a first particular internal winning combination (eg "strong cherry lip") and a second particular internal winning combination (eg "cherry" B) and the first specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means In the case where the result of the predetermined lottery is a win (for example, when any one of the special reel actions 2 to 4 is determined), the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game When the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the predetermined lottery result is not performed (for example, the special reel action 2 to 4 is executed). When it is a winning game (for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined), an effect by the second symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game (for example, the special reel action 1 The main effect means (for example, the reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) performing the execution of the), and the effect by the first symbol variation mode or the effect by the second symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means Basic continuation number giving means (for example, sub CPU 81) for giving the basic continuation number in the advantageous gaming state (for example, adding 150, 300, 400 or 500 to the difference sheet counter for AT management); An addition continuation number giving means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for giving an addition continuation number in the advantageous gaming state on the basis of the effect according to the first symbol variation mode being performed by the issuing means; A gaming machine characterized by the number granting means granting the right to continue the advantageous gaming state.

  According to this gaming machine, the winning of the winning combination is not limited to merely generating the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), but is performed by the symbol variation mode to be executed in the next game based on the winning of the winning combination. When the effect (for example, special reel action) is performed and the effect according to the first symbol variation mode (for example, any of special reel actions 2 to 4) is performed, the number of addition continuation times added to the basic continuation number Since the player is configured to add the character, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation not only in the game winning the winning combination or winning a prize but also in the next game.

  Further, when the first specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the symbol fluctuation stop control unit is configured to perform the stop operation at a predetermined timing (for example, each reel) In the case where the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing when the “BAR” symbol is stopped and displayed and the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means And the variation of the symbols is stopped so that at least a part of the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are different.

  According to this gaming machine, a player who wishes to quickly recognize the type of the fixed combination is made to look at each reel at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing when the symbol "BAR" is stopped and displayed) according to the symbol variation mode. The type can be recognized before the effect is performed. On the other hand, the player who wants to recognize whether the addition is successful (i.e., the addition continuation number is given) by the effect in the symbol variation mode continues the expectation by continuing the above-mentioned look-ahead. I can play a game. That is, since it is possible to notify whether the addition is successful or not by the notification form and timing desired by the player, it is possible to perform notification in accordance with the preference of the player regarding notification of the addition.

  Further, the basic continuation number giving means determines and gives one of the basic continuation numbers among the plurality of basic continuation numbers, and the addition continuation number giving means gives one of the plurality of addition continuation numbers. A game machine characterized by determining and giving an addition continuation number.

  According to this gaming machine, the basic continuation number and the addition continuation number to be granted can be varied, and the continuation number of the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) can be diversified.

  A profit corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means and symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns is given A gaming machine provided with profit giving means (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) and notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying the player of information. Internal winning combination determination means (for example, internal lottery processing by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a start operation of the player (for example, an operation to the start lever 16); Start changing the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 51 and reel control) Processing) and symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, main) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) A reel stop control process and a reel control process by the CPU 51, a specific internal winning combination (for example, "strong chance ripple") is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation is performed in a specific order (for example, First left stop) A combination of symbols specific to the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, a combination of symbols of any of “special lip A1 to 6” or “special lip B”) Transition the gaming state from the normal gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state") to the first gaming state (for example, "main CZ state 1") based on the fact that In the first gaming state, when a specific transition condition is established during a specific number of times of gaming (for example, during 8 games), the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (for example, A game state transition control unit (for example, the main CPU 51) which causes the game state to shift from the first gaming state to the normal gaming state when the specific transition condition is not satisfied. Main effect means (e.g., reels by the main CPU 51) performing effects (e.g., effects by the reel actions 1 to 8) in the first game state and in the first gaming state and the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means In the effect control process) and in the first gaming state, the game operation by the player is invalidated according to the effect by the symbol variation mode performed by the main effect means. The specific internal winning combination is determined by the specific lock executing means (for example, the game start locking process by the main CPU 51) for executing the specific lock and the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation is predetermined (For example, pushing order for superimposition lock), and based on the fact that a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "middle replay") is stopped on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means, the game Control means including predetermined lock execution means (for example, lock execution processing at the game end by the main CPU 51) for executing a predetermined lock (for example, lock based on lock data after all stop) to invalidate the game operation by the player In the case where the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state (for example, the main CPU 51) and the gaming state transition control means The sub-control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) including the sub rendering means (for example, processing at the time of start command reception by the sub CPU 81) for notifying information of advantageous stop operation related to the application of gaming media by the notification means; The specific transition condition is that the effect according to a specific symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means (for example, the reel actions 5 to 8 are executed), and the predetermined lock is performed by the predetermined lock execution means Specific benefit of giving the player a specific benefit (for example, determination of the AT count additional value, transition to a pseudo-determination state) different from the benefit of shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when A game machine characterized by further comprising giving means (for example, sub CPU 81, main CPU 51).

  Further, in the second gaming state, when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock execution unit, the specific profit giving unit is configured to receive the information on the stop operation by the sub rendering unit as the particular profit. A gaming machine characterized by giving a profit (for example, determination of AT number addition value by control of the sub CPU 81) to increase the number of times of being notified.

  In the second gaming state, when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock executing means, the specific profit awarding means sets the gaming state from the second gaming state to the third gaming state as the specific profit. A gaming machine characterized by imparting a profit to shift to a gaming state (for example, transition to an effect gaming state “pseudo probability state” by control of the main CPU 51).

  According to this gaming machine, in a chance zone state (for example, "main CZ state 1") where lock execution is easy to be performed, depending on the type of effect (for example, reel action) by the symbol variation mode executed at the time of lock execution. By shifting to the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming), the sense of expectation can be significantly improved.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when the transition to the chance zone state is not appropriate (for example, during AT game or during AT preparation), a specific internal winning combination (for example, the opportunity transition to the chance zone state) If you win the “strong chance lip”), you will not shift to the chance zone state to prevent the game contents from becoming unclear and win different internal winning combinations by giving different benefits. You can enjoy the benefits.

  A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for fluctuating display of a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows and a reel normal control means (for example, a main CPU 51 for normal control of the plurality of reels Reel control processing) and, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, reel effect determination means (for example, lock lottery processing by the main CPU 51) for determining the type of effects according to the symbol variation mode of the plurality of reels, and symbols of the plurality of reels It is a gaming machine provided with a reel effect control means (for example, a reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) for controlling an effect (for example, a reel action) according to a variation mode, wherein the reel effect control means determines the reel effect The excitation output selection data corresponds to each of the plurality of reels according to the type of effect determined by the means. Reel effect selection data determination means (for example, the process of S276 in the reel effect control process under control of the main CPU 51) for determining the selected reel effect selection data, and the reel determined by the reel effect selection data determination means Indicates the type of excitation output table in which the rotation direction and rotation amount of the reel is determined based on the data for effect selection, or that at least the effect symbol position to start effect on the reel should be adjusted Excitation output selection data determination means (for example, the processing of S277 in the reel effect control process under control of the main CPU 51) for determining the type of symbol position adjustment data as excitation output selection data (for example, the excitation output selection data determination means The symbol position adjustment data as the excitation output selection data The effect symbol position adjustment means (for example, the reel effect adjustment output process by the main CPU 51) for adjusting the effect symbol position when it is determined, the effect symbol position adjustment means including the symbol position adjustment data The excitation output table is selected according to the type of the symbol and the effect symbol position (for example, the process of S294, the process of S297, the process of S300, and the process of S308 in the reel effect adjustment output process under control of the main CPU 51) A game machine characterized by performing adjustment of the above-mentioned production pattern position by doing.

  According to this gaming machine, when the excitation output table is determined as the selection data for excitation output, excitation output control is performed using the excitation output table, and the symbol position adjustment data is determined as the selection data for excitation output. If it is determined, the excitation output table is selected according to the type of symbol position adjustment data and the effect symbol position, and excitation output control is performed using the selected excitation output table. The symbol position of the reel can be adjusted only when it is desired to produce effects in the symbol variation aspect of the reel in a state where the symbols (for example, “red 7” symbol) are aligned, so the start of the presentation by the symbol variation aspect of the reel Even if a shift occurs in the symbol position of the reel during the effect by the symbol variation aspect of the front or the reel, the shift is adjusted without increasing the control load Te, it is possible to enjoy the effects by symbol variation aspect of intended reels to the player.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting fluctuation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and displayed on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means And a profit giving means for giving a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) An advantageous gaming state control means (for example, sub CPU 81) which controls an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) which is advantageous for the player until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied based on the predetermined starting condition being satisfied. Controlling the start and end of the output of the first external signal (for example, the external signal 2) indicating that the advantageous gaming state is controlled by the advantageous gaming state control means, and by the advantageous gaming state control means External signal output control means (for example, external signal output management processing by the main CPU 51) for controlling start and end of output of a second external signal (for example, external signal 1) indicating that the advantageous gaming state has continued; The external signal output control means is based on the fact that a predetermined output start condition is satisfied (for example, that the number-of-games counter in the normal game has become 3). And starts outputting the first external signal and starts outputting the first external signal based on the fact that only the first external signal is output in a unit game different from the unit game. When the output of the second external signal is started and the first external signal and the second external signal are output, a specific output end condition is satisfied (for example, winning in AT game) Only when the output of the second external signal is ended based on the fact that the number counter has reached a predetermined value, and the first external signal and the second external signal are being output, the predetermined A game machine characterized by terminating output of the first external signal and the second external signal based on the satisfaction of the output termination condition (for example, that the AT termination counter has become 2).

  According to this gaming machine, the first external signal (for example, the external signal 2) indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) and the continued advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT gaming) And a second external signal (for example, external signal 1) indicating that the number of the first hit and the number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state of high interest to the player is appropriately displayed by the external display or the like be able to.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, the first external signal (for example, external signal 2) indicating that the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) is controlled, and the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) continue The second external signal (for example, the external signal 1) indicating that has been output is output at a different timing by a simple configuration, so that the control burden on the external display can be reduced, and a communication error etc. Can also be mitigated.

  Further, the predetermined output start condition is a condition that the establishment thereof comes later than the predetermined start condition (for example, the start of AT game by the control of the sub CPU 81), and the specific output end condition is the predetermined A game machine characterized in that its establishment comes later than the end condition of (for example, the end of AT game controlled by the sub CPU 81).

  According to this gaming machine, with regard to the start and end of the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), the notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11 etc.) controlled by the sub control circuit rather than the display by the external display or the like Since the notification can be made to the player as soon as possible, the convenience of the player playing the game can be improved.

  Further, a difference number management means (for example, a difference number counter for AT management) which manages the difference number in the advantageous gaming state, and a winning number management means (for example, AT) which manages the number of wins of the specific small combination in the advantageous gaming state. The predetermined end condition is that the number of difference sheets managed by the difference sheet management means has become a predetermined number (for example, 0 or less), and the specific output A game machine characterized in that the termination condition is that the number of winnings managed by the number-of-winnings managing means has become a predetermined number (for example, 38).

  According to this gaming machine, in particular, it is possible to appropriately display the number of continuation (one set) of AT gaming with a simple configuration.

  Based on symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and a player's start operation (for example, operation to the start lever 16) Start changing the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation and an internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination A symbol displayed on the symbol display means on the basis of the means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation of the player (for example, the operation to the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) Symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation; And a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) for giving a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols when the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the stop control means. The internal winning combination is a combination of the first symbols (e.g., 7 pieces of pressing order correct ascend right) when the stopping operation is performed in the first stopping operation order (e.g., "middle left and right") The first internal winning combination (for example, middle left and right bell A) to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the stop operation are performed in the second stop operation order (for example, "right and left middle") And a second internal winning combination (for example, right and left middle bell B), in which a second combination of symbols (for example, seven pressing middle correct steps) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the stop An operation is performed in the first stop operation sequence In this case, the third internal winning combination (for example, middle left and right bell C), in which the third symbol combination (for example, seven pressing order correct lower steps) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the stop operation A fourth internal winning combination (for example, right and left middle bell C) in which the combination of the third symbols is displayed on the symbol display means when the second stop operation order is performed, The internal winning combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination and the second internal winning combination as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, a coefficient “750”); The internal winning combination of 3 and the fourth internal winning combination are determined as the internal winning combination with a second probability (for example, a coefficient “250”) lower than the first probability, and the profit granting means The combination of the first symbol, the combination of the second symbol and the combination of the third symbol are A gaming machine characterized by giving a predetermined profit (for example, payout of seven medals) which is the same profit when displayed on the symbol display means.

  In the first internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation order (for example, “right and left middle”) different from the first stop operation order, the first internal winning combination is performed at the timing of the stop operation. Accordingly, one of the combinations of a plurality of fourth symbols (for example, one correct pressed position) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the second internal winning combination is The plurality of the fourth symbols according to the timing of the stop operation when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation order (for example, "middle left and right") different from the second stop operation order One of the combinations (e.g., one correct pressed position) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the third internal winning combination is that the stop operation is the first one. Stop operation order is different from the stop operation order In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the plurality of combinations of the fourth symbol (for example, a single question) is an internal winning combination that will be displayed on the symbol display means, The fourth internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the stop operation order different from the second stop operation order, a plurality of the fourth symbol regardless of the timing of the stop operation One of the combinations (for example, a single question) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the profit imparting means uses the fourth symbol combination in the symbol display means. When displayed, a gaming machine characterized by giving a specific profit (for example, payout of one medal) smaller than the predetermined profit.

  According to this gaming machine, even in the case of defining a plurality of pushing order small winning combinations, it is possible to prevent monotonous appearance (combination of displayed symbols) when the stop operation order is correct. .

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even when a plurality of push-to-order small-combinations are specified, the number of internal winning combinations is reduced to reduce the volume of data and reduce the control load of the internal lottery process. be able to.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, even when a plurality of pushing order minors are specified, it is easy to uniformly assign desired lottery values by reducing the number of internal winning combinations, and it is possible to make the lottery fair. It also contributes to gender and ease of design.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and start operation detection means (for example, start switch) for detecting a start operation by a player 16S), a stop operation detection means (for example, a stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation by a player, and an internal winning combination determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means Symbol variation starting symbol variation displayed on the symbol display unit based on the winning combination determination unit (for example, internal lottery processing by the main CPU 51) and the fact that the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit Start control means (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation detection means The symbol fluctuation stop control for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means within the range of the predetermined maximum number of sliding symbols (for example, for four symbols) based on the detection of the stop operation According to the means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 51) and that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, either the cherry lip or the strong cherry lip is determined as the internal winning combination) Based on the main effect means (for example, the main CPU 51) performing effects (for example, special reel action) according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means, and the effect according to the symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means Lock start means (for example, the main CPU 51) for starting a lock to invalidate the game operation by the player, and the lock start Lock period determination means (for example, shown in FIG. 77 by the main CPU 51) for determining the lock period in which the lock continues based on the fact that the lock is started by the stage and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means Lock start processing (for example, the main CPU 51) for ending the lock based on the game start lock execution processing) and the end of the lock based on the passage of the lock period determined by the lock period determination unit; The variable stop control means continues the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means when the lock period is determined by the lock period determination means until the lock is ended by the lock end means Even if the lock is terminated by the lock termination unit (eg, step of FIG. 78). In S574, it is determined that the stop operation detection unit has detected the stop operation (for example, step S576 in FIG. 78) based on the fact that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is determined to be 0). A gaming machine characterized by stopping fluctuation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display means) based on the request for outputting a special on-edge signal.

  Further, the lock period determination means is configured to lock the lock based on a position (for example, a pseudo stop start position) displayed on the symbol display means when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. A game machine characterized by determining a period.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and start operation detection means (for example, start switch) for detecting a start operation by a player 16S), a stop operation detection means (for example, a stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation by a player, and an internal winning combination determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means Symbol variation starting symbol variation displayed on the symbol display unit based on the winning combination determination unit (for example, internal lottery processing by the main CPU 51) and the fact that the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit Start control means (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation detection means The symbol fluctuation stop control for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means within the range of the predetermined maximum number of sliding symbols (for example, for four symbols) based on the detection of the stop operation Means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 51) and that a specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, cherry lip or strong cherry lip as an internal winning combination) The main effect means (for example, the main CPU 51) for performing effects (for example, special reel action) according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means based on any one of the above being determined) and the main effect means Lock start means (eg, for example, to start a lock to invalidate the game operation by the player when the effect by the symbol variation mode is performed by the A specific combination of symbols relating to the specific internal winning combination based on that the lock is started by the in-CPU 51) and the lock start means and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means When the stop operation is detected by the position (for example, the symbol position of 12 and 17 of symbol position data) at which the symbol (for example, "cherry" symbol) is displayed on the symbol display means and the stop operation detection means Lock period determination means (for example, shown in FIG. 77 by the main CPU 51) for determining the lock period in which the lock continues in accordance with the position (for example, the pseudo stop start position) displayed on the symbol display means of The lock is determined based on the execution of the lock at the start of the game and the fact that the lock period determined by the lock period determining means has elapsed. Lock termination means (for example, the main CPU 51) for terminating the lock operation, and the symbol fluctuation stop control means performs the stop operation by the stop operation detection means when the lock period is determined by the lock period determination means Is detected by the lock end unit (eg, in step S 574 of FIG. 78), the special control flag Assuming that the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means based on the fact that the effect timer is judged to be 0 (on, for example, in step S576 in FIG. 78), an output of a special on-edge signal Based on the fact that the specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means) based on the request being made Gaming machine, characterized in that stop variation.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding symbols has been changed by using effects (for example, special reel action) in the symbol variation mode, so the maximum number of sliding symbols is Even in the case of four frames, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest for the stop operation.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, a combination of symbols related to a specific internal winning combination (for example, cherry lip or strong cherry lip) (for example, a combination of symbols related to cherry lip A “cherry-ANY-ANY”) Since it is possible to easily stop the symbols to be configured (for example, the "cherry" symbol on the reel 3L), the player can easily detect that a specific internal winning combination has been established. It is possible to dramatically improve the interest of

  In addition, a stop operation continuation suggestion effect (for example, a stop operation continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 79) for notifying that the stop operation should be continued based on the effect being performed by the symbol variation mode by the main effect means. It further comprises an effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for executing the above.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to reliably enjoy an effect (for example, a special reel action) by a symbol variation mode which can give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding symbols has been changed.

  As mentioned above, although this embodiment was described, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the specific configuration of each means included in the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the example adopted in the present embodiment described above, and any modification is possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are adopted as symbol display means, but instead of or in addition to this, a configuration using a liquid crystal display device It may be That is, the image of the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be variably displayed. Further, the display window may be a single display window 4, and a part of the symbols arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3 L, 3 C, 3 R may be displayed by the display window 4.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the internal winning combination determining means, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value generated by the random number generator 56 and performs the internal lottery process, but instead of this, Alternatively, together with this, a random number generation circuit (not shown) built in the main CPU 51 may be used to obtain random number values.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the start switch 16S for detecting the operation to the start lever 16 is adopted as the start operation detecting means for detecting the player's start operation, and the stop for detecting the player's stop operation is stopped. Although the stop switch 17S for detecting the operation to the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is adopted as the operation detecting means, a touch panel switch may be used instead of or in addition to this.

  Also, for example, various counters and various timers managed by the control of main CPU 51 or sub CPU 81 shown in the present embodiment appropriately change the management mode within the scope of the present invention. be able to. For example, various counters and various timers managed by "addition" may be managed by "subtraction", and in this case, the determination as to "is above" is "below". The determination as to whether or not the condition is “over” is read as the determination as to whether or not the condition is “less than”. Also, for example, various counters and various timers managed by "subtraction" may be managed by "addition", and in this case, the determination as to "is less than or equal to" may be " The judgment as to whether or not the above is replaced with the judgment as to whether or not the term is "less than", and the judgment as to whether or not "less than" is referred to as the judgment as to whether or not as "more than".

  Further, for example, the various counters managed under the control of the main CPU 51 described in the present embodiment may be managed under the control of the sub CPU 81 without departing from the spirit of the present invention. The various counters managed by the control of the above may be managed by the control of the main CPU 51 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Further, for example, the various gaming states managed under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in the present embodiment may be managed under the control of the sub CPU 81 without departing from the spirit of the present invention, Various game states managed by the control of the CPU 81 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 51 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  It should be noted that all the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, gaming machines, slot machines and all other gaming machines without departing from the scope of the invention. it can.

1 Pachi-slot machine 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4L, 4C, 4R Display window 16 Start lever 16S Start switch 17L, 17C, 17R Stop button 17S Stop switch 41 Main control circuit 42 Secondary control circuit 51 Main CPU
53 Main RAM
81 Sub CPU
83 sub RAM

Claims (2)

Advantageous gaming state control means for controlling an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied based on the predetermined starting condition being satisfied;
Notification means for notifying the player of various information;
And a notification control unit configured to control a notification executed by the notification unit, the gaming machine comprising:
The advantageous gaming state control means sets, as the predetermined start condition, that a predetermined gaming period has elapsed since establishment of the predetermined termination condition in at least a normal gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state.
The notification control means determines one specific notification data from among a plurality of specific notification data in accordance with a game period until the predetermined game period elapses in the normal gaming state, and the determined specific notification data Making a notification according to the notification by the notification means,
The plurality of specific notification data includes at least a first specific notification data and a second specific notification data,
When the game period until the predetermined game period passes is the first range and when it is the second range, the first specific notification data can be determined with a predetermined probability and The second specific broadcast data can be determined with the probability of
The second specific notification data can be determined with the predetermined probability when the game period until the predetermined game period elapses is the third range and when the game period is the fourth range, The first specific broadcast data can be determined with the specific probability,
A gaming machine characterized by having a short game period until the predetermined game period elapses in the order of the third range, the first range, the fourth range, and the second range. The plurality of specific notification data further includes third specific notification data,
When the game period until the predetermined game period elapses is the first range, the third specific notification data can be determined with the predetermined probability,
When the game period until the predetermined game period has passed is the second range, the third range, and the fourth range, the above-mentioned first with the specific probability The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification data of 3 can be determined.

Images